Nokia E51 User Manual

E 5 1 U s e r G u i d e  
The availability of particular products and applications for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and  
availability of language options.  
Export controls  
This device may contain commodities, technology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion  
contrary to law is prohibited.  
Model number: E51-1  
C o n t e n t s  
Select ringing tones...................................................25  
Customise profiles......................................................25  
Change the display theme.........................................25  
Download a theme.....................................................26  
Change audio themes................................................26  
3-D ringing tones.......................................................26  
Volume control..............................................................27  
One-touch keys..............................................................27  
Home key....................................................................27  
Contacts key................................................................27  
Calendar key................................................................28  
E-mail key....................................................................28  
Multitasking...................................................................28  
Memory..........................................................................28  
Free memory...............................................................28  
Memory card...............................................................29  
Insert the memory card..........................................29  
Use a memory card..................................................29  
Eject the memory card............................................30  
Write text.......................................................................30  
Traditional text input.................................................30  
Predictive text input..................................................31  
Change the writing language...................................31  
Antennas........................................................................31  
Further information......................................................32  
F o r y o u r s a f e t y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0  
About your device.........................................................11  
Network services...........................................................11  
Enhancements, batteries, and chargers.....................12  
G e t s t a r t e d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3  
Insert the SIM card and battery...................................13  
Charge the battery........................................................14  
Keys and parts...............................................................15  
Connect the headset.....................................................16  
Attach the wrist strap...................................................16  
First start-up..................................................................16  
Lock the keys.................................................................17  
Display indicators..........................................................17  
Nokia support and contact information.....................19  
Y o u r N o k i a E 5 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 0  
Settings wizard.............................................................20  
Standby modes..............................................................21  
Active standby............................................................21  
Standby.......................................................................21  
Menu...............................................................................22  
Common actions in several applications....................22  
Transfer..........................................................................23  
Transfer content between devices...........................23  
View transfer log........................................................24  
Synchronise, retrieve, and send data.......................24  
Personalisation..............................................................24  
Profiles.........................................................................24  
B u s i n e s s c o m m u n i c a t i o n s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3  
Telephone......................................................................33  
Voice calls....................................................................33  
Answer a call............................................................33  
Make a call................................................................33  
Make a conference call............................................34  
Fax calls....................................................................34  
Video calls...................................................................34  
Manage contact groups.............................................43  
Add ringing tones for contacts.................................43  
Send business cards...................................................44  
Manage received business cards..............................44  
SIM directory...............................................................44  
Make a video call.....................................................34 Calendar.........................................................................45  
Share a video...........................................................35  
Receive a video sharing invitation........................35  
Net calls.......................................................................35  
Create a net call profile...........................................36  
Connect to the net call service...............................36  
Make net calls...........................................................37  
Net call service settings..........................................37  
Speed dialling.............................................................37  
Call divert....................................................................37  
Call barring..................................................................38  
Create calendar entries..............................................45  
Create a meeting entry..............................................46  
To-do entries..............................................................46  
Calendar views............................................................46  
Work in different views..........................................47  
Month view..............................................................47  
Week view................................................................47  
Day view...................................................................47  
To-do view...............................................................47  
Calendar settings........................................................47  
Bar net calls.................................................................38 Web................................................................................48  
Send DTMF tones........................................................39  
Voice mail....................................................................39  
Voice aid.........................................................................39  
Make a call...................................................................40  
Launch an application................................................40  
Change profiles...........................................................41  
Voice command settings...........................................41  
Log..................................................................................41  
Connection security....................................................48  
Browse the web..........................................................48  
Bookmarks..................................................................49  
Clear the cache............................................................49  
Feeds and blogs..........................................................49  
End a connection........................................................49  
Web settings...............................................................49  
M e s s a g i n g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 0  
Call and data registers...............................................41 Messaging folders.........................................................50  
Monitor all communications.....................................41 Organise messages.......................................................51  
Call and send messages from Log.............................42 Message reader.............................................................51  
Log settings................................................................42 Speech............................................................................51  
Contacts..........................................................................42  
Copy contacts between SIM and device  
Edit the voice properties...........................................51  
E-mail messages............................................................52  
Set up your e-mail with the mailbox guide.............52  
Connect to a remote mailbox....................................53  
memory.......................................................................42  
Manage contacts.........................................................42  
Read and reply to e-mail...........................................53  
Write and send e-mail...............................................54  
Delete messages.........................................................54  
Subfolders in your remote e-mail.............................54  
Text messages...............................................................54  
Write and send text messages..................................54  
Sending options for text messages..........................55  
Text messages on the SIM card.................................55  
View picture messages..............................................55  
Forward picture messages........................................56  
Multimedia messages...................................................56  
Create and send multimedia messages...................56  
Receive and reply to multimedia messages............57  
Create presentations..................................................57  
View presentations....................................................58  
View and save multimedia attachments.................58  
Forward a multimedia message...............................58  
Send a sound clip.......................................................59  
Sending options for multimedia messages.............59  
Special message types..................................................59  
Cell broadcast................................................................60  
Messaging settings.......................................................60  
Text message settings...............................................60  
Multimedia message settings...................................61  
E-mail account settings.............................................62  
Connection settings.................................................62  
User settings............................................................62  
Retrieval settings.....................................................62  
Automatic retrieval settings...................................63  
Service message settings..........................................63  
Cell broadcast settings...............................................63  
Other settings.............................................................63  
N o k i a O f f i c e T o o l s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4  
Active notes...................................................................64  
Create and edit notes.................................................64  
Settings for Active notes............................................64  
Search.............................................................................65  
Search for information..............................................65  
Search results..............................................................65  
Calculator.......................................................................65  
File manager..................................................................66  
Quickoffice.....................................................................66  
Work with files...........................................................66  
Nokia Team suite..........................................................66  
Work with teams........................................................67  
Edit teams...................................................................67  
Nokia Team Suite settings.........................................67  
Action bar settings.....................................................67  
Converter........................................................................68  
Convert measurements..............................................68  
Set base currency and exchange rate......................68  
Zip manager...................................................................68  
PDF reader......................................................................69  
Printing..........................................................................69  
Print files.....................................................................69  
Printing options.........................................................69  
Printer settings...........................................................70  
Clock...............................................................................70  
Alarm clock..................................................................70  
World clock.................................................................70  
Clock settings..............................................................70  
Notes..............................................................................71  
Write and send notes.................................................71  
F r e e t i m e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2  
Camera...........................................................................72  
Capture an image.......................................................72 Push to talk....................................................................81  
Record a video clip.....................................................72  
Camera settings..........................................................73  
Gallery............................................................................73  
Work with media files and folders...........................73  
View images................................................................73  
Manage image files....................................................74  
RealPlayer......................................................................74  
PTT settings................................................................82  
Log in to PTT service..................................................82  
Make a PTT call...........................................................82  
Created PTT calls.........................................................82  
Manage PTT contacts.................................................83  
Create a PTT channel..................................................83  
Exit PTT........................................................................83  
Play video clips and stream links..............................74 About GPS and satellite signals...................................83  
Send audio files and video clips...............................75 Positioning settings......................................................84  
View information about a media clip......................75 Nokia Maps.....................................................................85  
RealPlayer settings.....................................................75  
Music player...................................................................75  
Listen to music...........................................................75  
Track lists....................................................................76  
Music categories.........................................................76  
Preset frequency settings..........................................76  
Recorder.........................................................................76  
Download maps..........................................................85  
Satellite information..................................................86  
Browse maps..............................................................86  
Find a place.................................................................87  
Plan a route.................................................................87  
Navigation...................................................................87  
Guides..........................................................................88  
Record a sound clip....................................................77 GPS data.........................................................................88  
Play a recording..........................................................77  
Use GPS data...............................................................88  
Instant messaging........................................................77  
Define IM settings.......................................................78  
Start a conversation...................................................78  
IM groups....................................................................78  
Block users..................................................................79  
IM application settings..............................................79  
Create a landmark......................................................89  
Edit landmarks............................................................89  
Landmark categories.................................................89  
Receive landmarks.....................................................90  
C o n n e c t i v i t y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1  
Flash player....................................................................80 Fast downloading.........................................................91  
Manage flash files.......................................................80 Nokia PC Suite................................................................91  
Visual radio....................................................................80 Data cable......................................................................91  
Listen to the radio......................................................80 Infrared..........................................................................92  
View visual content....................................................81 Bluetooth.......................................................................92  
Saved stations.............................................................81  
Visual Radio settings..................................................81  
About Bluetooth.........................................................92  
Send and receive data with Bluetooth.....................93  
Pair devices.................................................................94 Activation keys............................................................108  
Security tips................................................................95 Use activation keys..................................................108  
SIM access profile..........................................................95 Data synchronisation..................................................109  
Wireless LAN..................................................................96  
WLAN connections......................................................96  
See WLAN availability.................................................96  
Create a synchronisation profile.............................110  
Select applications to synchronise.........................110  
Synchronisation connection settings.....................110  
WLAN wizard...............................................................96 Download!...................................................................110  
Internet access points..................................................97  
Set up an internet access point for packet data  
Select catalogs, folders, and items.........................111  
Download! settings..................................................111  
(GPRS)..........................................................................98 Software updates........................................................111  
Advanced internet access point settings for packet  
S e t t i n g s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3  
data (GPRS)..................................................................98  
Set up an access point for WLAN manually..............99 General settings..........................................................113  
Advanced access point settings for WLAN...............99  
Modem.........................................................................100  
Connection manager..................................................100  
View and end active connections...........................100  
Search for WLAN.......................................................100  
Personalisation settings..........................................113  
Display settings.....................................................113  
Standby mode settings.........................................114  
Tone settings.........................................................114  
Language settings.................................................114  
Notification light...................................................114  
Date and time settings............................................115  
Enhancement settings.............................................115  
Common enhancement settings..........................115  
Security settings.......................................................115  
Device and SIM card security................................115  
Restore original settings.........................................116  
S e c u r i t y a n d d a t a m a n a g e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 2  
Fixed dialling...............................................................103  
Certificate manager....................................................103  
View certificate details............................................104  
Certificate trust settings..........................................104 Telephone settings.....................................................116  
Security modules.........................................................104  
View and edit security modules.............................105  
Call settings...............................................................116  
Network settings......................................................117  
Back up data................................................................105 Connection settings....................................................117  
Remote configuration................................................105  
Application manager..................................................106  
Install applications...................................................107  
Installation settings.................................................107  
Java security settings...............................................107  
Access points............................................................117  
Packet data (GPRS) settings....................................118  
WLAN settings..........................................................118  
Advanced WLAN settings.........................................118  
WLAN security settings............................................119  
WEP security settings...............................................119  
WEP key settings......................................................119  
802.1x security settings..........................................119  
WPA security settings..............................................120  
Wireless LAN plugins................................................120  
EAP plug-ins...........................................................120  
Use EAP plug-ins....................................................120  
Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings..............120  
Edit SIP profiles........................................................121  
Edit SIP proxy servers...............................................121  
Edit registration servers..........................................121  
Net call settings........................................................122  
Configuration settings.............................................122  
Restrict packet data.................................................122  
Application settings....................................................122  
A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 6  
Small children..............................................................136  
Operating environment..............................................136  
Medical devices...........................................................136  
Implanted medical devices.....................................136  
Hearing aids..............................................................137  
Vehicles........................................................................137  
Potentially explosive environments.........................137  
Emergency calls...........................................................138  
CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR)...........................138  
M A N U F A C T U R E R ’ S L I M I T E D W A R R A N T Y . . . . . . 1 4 0  
Warranty period..........................................................140  
How to get warranty service.....................................141  
What is not covered?..................................................141  
Other important notices.............................................142  
Limitation of Nokia's liability....................................143  
Statutory obligations..................................................143  
S h o r t c u t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 3  
General shortcuts........................................................123  
G l o s s a r y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 5  
I n d e x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 4  
N o k i a o r i g i n a l e n h a n c e m e n t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 9  
Enhancements.............................................................129  
Battery..........................................................................129  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 0  
B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 3  
Charging and discharging..........................................133  
Nokia battery authentication guidelines.................134  
Authenticate hologram...........................................134  
What if your battery is not authentic?...................134  
C a r e a n d m a i n t e n a n c e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 5  
F o r y o u r s a f e t y  
Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may  
be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide  
for further information.  
S W I T C H O F F W H E N R E F U E L I N G  
Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do  
not use near fuel or chemicals.  
S W I T C H O N S A F E L Y  
S W I T C H O F F N E A R B L A S T I N G  
Do not switch the device on when wireless  
phone use is prohibited or when it may  
cause interference or danger.  
Follow any restrictions. Do not use the  
device where blasting is in progress.  
U S E S E N S I B L Y  
R O A D S A F E T Y C O M E S F I R S T  
Use only in the positions as explained in the  
product documentation. Do not touch the  
antenna areas unnecessarily.  
Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands  
free to operate the vehicle while driving.  
Your first consideration while driving should  
be road safety.  
Q U A L I F I E D S E R V I C E  
Only qualified personnel may install or  
I N T E R F E R E N C E  
repair this product.  
All wireless devices may be susceptible to  
interference, which could affect  
performance.  
E N H A N C E M E N T S A N D B A T T E R I E S  
Use only approved enhancements and  
batteries. Do not connect incompatible  
products.  
S W I T C H O F F I N H O S P I T A L S  
Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off  
W A T E R - R E S I S T A N C E  
near medical equipment.  
Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it  
S W I T C H O F F I N A I R C R A F T  
dry.  
Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can  
cause interference in aircraft.  
B A C K - U P C O P I E S  
Remember to make back-up copies or keep  
a writtenrecord ofallimportantinformation  
stored in your device.  
1 0  
 
C O N N E C T I N G T O O T H E R D E V I C E S  
requests, download content, and accept installations  
only from trustworthy sources. To increase the security  
of your devices, consider installing, using, and  
regularly updating antivirus software, firewall, and  
other related software on your device and any  
connected computer.  
When connecting to any other device, read  
its user guide for detailed safety  
instructions. Do not connect incompatible  
products.  
E M E R G E N C Y C A L L S  
Ensure the phone function of the device is  
switched on and in service. Press the end key  
as many times as needed to clear the display  
and return to the standby mode. Enter the  
emergency number, then press the call key.  
Give your location. Do not end the call until  
given permission to do so.  
W a r n i n g : To use any features in this device,  
other than the alarm clock, the device must be  
switched on. Do not switch the device on when  
wireless device use may cause interference or danger.  
During extended operation, such as an active video  
sharing session or high-speed data connection, the  
device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is  
normal. If you suspect the device is not working  
properly, take it to the nearest authorized service  
facility.  
A b o u t y o u r d e v i c e  
The office applications support common features of  
Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office  
2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed  
or modified.  
The wireless device described in this guide is approved  
for use on the GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900, and UMTS 850  
and 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for  
more information about networks.  
When using the features in this device, obey all laws  
and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate  
rights of others, including copyrights.  
N e t w o r k s e r v i c e s  
Copyright protections may prevent some images,  
music (including ringing tones), and other content  
from being copied, modified, transferred, or  
forwarded.  
To use the phone you must have service from a wireless  
service provider. Many of the features require special  
network features. These features are not available on  
all networks; other networks may require that you  
make specific arrangements with your service provider  
before you can use the network services. Your service  
provider can give you instructions and explain what  
charges will apply. Some networks may have  
Your device supports internet connections and other  
methods of connectivity. Like computers, your device  
may be exposed to viruses, malicious messages and  
applications, and other harmful content. Exercise  
caution and open messages, accept connectivity  
1 1  
limitations that affect how you can use network  
   
services. For instance, some networks may not support For availability of approved enhancements, please  
all language-dependent characters and services.  
check with your dealer. When you disconnect the  
power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the  
plug, not the cord.  
Your service provider may have requested that certain  
features be disabled or not activated in your device. If  
so, these features will not appear on your device menu.  
Your device may also have a special configuration such  
as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons.  
Contact your service provider for more information.  
This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL)  
that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this  
device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require  
network support for these technologies.  
E n h a n c e m e n t s ,  
b a t t e r i e s , a n d  
c h a r g e r s  
Always switch the device off and disconnect the  
charger before removing the battery.  
Check the model number of any charger before use  
with this device. This device is intended for use when  
supplied with power from the AC-5 charger.  
The battery intended for use with this device is BP-6MT.  
W a r n i n g : Use only batteries, chargers, and  
enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this  
particular model. The use of any other types may  
invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be  
dangerous.  
1 2  
 
G e t s t a r t e d  
Model number: Nokia E51-1.  
Hereinafter referred to as Nokia E51.  
I n s e r t t h e S I M c a r d a n d  
b a t t e r y  
For availability and information on using SIM card  
services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the  
service provider or other vendor.  
3. Insert the SIM card. Make sure that the contact area  
on the card is facing the connectors on the device  
and that the bevelled corner is facing the top of the  
device.  
1. With the back of the device facing you, press the  
release button (1) and slide the back cover off (2).  
4. Insert the battery. Align the contacts of the battery  
with the corresponding connectors on the battery  
compartment and insert in the direction of the  
arrow.  
2. If the battery is inserted, lift the battery in the  
direction of the arrow to remove it.  
1 3  
     
3. When the battery is fully charged, disconnect the  
charger from the device, then from the wall outlet.  
Your battery has been precharged at the factory, but  
the charging levels may vary. To reach the full  
operation time, charge the battery until it has been  
fully charged according to the battery level indicator.  
T i p : If you have old compatible Nokia chargers,  
you can use them with the Nokia E51 by  
attaching the CA-44 charger adapter to the old  
charger. The adapter is available as a separate  
enhancement.  
5. Slide the back cover back to place.  
C h a r g e t h e b a t t e r y  
1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet.  
2
2. Connect the power cord to the device. If the battery  
is completely discharged, it may take a while before  
the charging indicator starts scrolling.  
1 4  
   
6 — Navi™ scroll key. Press the scroll key to enter a  
selection, to scroll left, right, up, and down on the  
display.  
K e y s a n d p a r t s  
7 — Selection key. Press the selection key to perform  
the function shown above it on the display.  
8— End key. Press the end keyto reject a call, endactive  
calls and held calls, and with a long keypress, end data  
connections.  
9 — Backspace key. Press the key to delete items.  
10 — Shift key. When writing text, press and hold the  
key and select the text with the scroll key. Press this  
key for a few seconds to toggle between the Silent and  
General profiles.  
11 — Press the key for a few seconds to switch on  
Bluetooth connectivity. When writing text, press the  
key and select M o r e s y m b o l s to access special  
characters.  
12 — Call key  
13 — Selection key  
14 — Infrared port  
15 — Voice key. This key is used in the voice commands,  
Recorder, and Push to talk applications.  
16 — Notification light and light sensor  
17 — Microphone  
1 — Earpiece  
2 — Power key  
3 — Volume up key  
18 — Headset connector  
19 — Wrist strap hole  
4 — Mute key. Press the key to mute the microphone  
20 — Mini-USB port  
during a call.  
21 — Charger connector  
5 — Volume down key  
1 5  
   
A t t a c h t h e w r i s t s t r a p  
Thread the wrist strap  
as shown, and tighten  
it.  
1 — Home key  
2 — Contacts key  
3 — E-mail key  
4 — Calendar key  
F i r s t s t a r t - u p  
1. Press and hold the power key.  
2. If the device asks for a PIN code or lock  
code, enter the code, and select O K .  
C o n n e c t t h e h e a d s e t  
3. When prompted, enter the country in  
which you are located and the current  
date and time. To find your country,  
enter the first letters of the country  
name. It is important to select the  
correct country, because scheduled  
calendar entries may change if you  
change the country later and the new  
country is located on a different time  
zone  
W a r n i n g : When you use the headset, your  
ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not  
use the headset where it can endanger your safety.  
Connect the compatible headset to the headset  
connector of your device.  
4. The Welcome application opens.  
Select from the various options, or  
select E x i t to close the application.  
To configure the various settings in your  
device, use the Settings wizard application and the  
wizards available in the standby mode. When you  
switch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card  
provider and configure some settings automatically.  
1 6  
         
You can also contact your service provider for the  
correct settings.  
To lock the keys manually in the standby mode, press  
the left selection key and * .  
You can switch the device on with no SIM card inserted,  
in which case the device starts up in the offline mode,  
and you cannot use the network-dependent phone  
functions.  
To unlock the keys, press the  
left selection key and * .  
T i p : To lock the keys  
in the menu or in an  
open application,  
To switch the device off, press and hold the power key.  
press the power key  
briefly, and select  
L o c k k e y p a d . To  
L o c k t h e k e y s  
unlock, press the left  
selection key and * .  
When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be  
possible to the official emergency number  
programmed into your device.  
The keypad of your device locks automatically to  
prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed. To  
change the period after which the keypad is locked,  
select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >  
S e c u r i t y > P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d > K e y p a d a u t o l o c k  
p e r i o d .  
D i s p l a y i n d i c a t o r s  
The device is being used in a GSM network  
(network service). The bar next to the icon indicates  
the signal strength of the network at your current  
location. The higher the bar, the stronger the signal.  
The device is being used in a UMTS network  
(network service).  
The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the  
stronger the charge in the battery.  
1 7  
       
You have one or more unread messages in the  
Inbox folder in Messaging.  
A UMTS packet data connection is available (network  
service).  
You have received new e-mail in the remote  
A UMTS packet data connection is active.  
A UMTS packet data connection on hold.  
mailbox.  
There are messages waiting to be sent in the  
Outbox folder in Messaging.  
High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is  
supported and available (network service). The icon  
may vary between regions.  
You have one or more missed phone calls.  
The keys of the device are locked.  
An alarm is active.  
High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is  
active. The icon may vary between regions.  
High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is on  
hold. The icon may vary between regions.  
You have selected the Silent profile, and the device  
does not ring for an incoming call or message.  
You have set the device to scan for WLANs, and a  
Bluetooth is active.  
WLAN is available.  
Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth  
connectivity. When the indicator is blinking, your  
device is trying to connect with another device.  
A WLAN connection is active in a network that does  
not have encryption.  
A WLAN connection is active in a network that has  
An infrared connection is active. If the indicator  
blinks, your device is trying to connect to the other  
device, or the connection has been lost.  
encryption.  
Your device is connected to a computer with a  
USB data cable.  
A GPRS packet data connection is available (network  
service).  
The second phone line is being used (network  
service).  
A GPRS packet data connection is active.  
A GPRS packet data connection is on hold.  
All calls are forwarded to another number. If  
you have two phone lines, a number indicates the  
active line.  
An EGPRS packet data connection is available  
(network service).  
A headset is connected to the device.  
An EGPRS connection is active.  
The connection to a headset with Bluetooth  
1 8  
An EGPRS packet data connection is on hold.  
connectivity has been lost.  
A hands-free car kit is connected to the device.  
A loopset is connected to the device.  
A text phone is connected to the device.  
Your device is synchronising.  
You have an ongoing push-to-talk connection.  
Your push-to-talk connection is in the do not  
disturb mode, because the ringing type setting of your  
device is set to B e e p o n c e or S i l e n t , or you have an  
incoming or ongoing phone call. In this mode, you  
cannot make PTT calls.  
N o k i a s u p p o r t a n d  
c o n t a c t i n f o r m a t i o n  
Check www.nokia-asia.com/E51/support or your local  
Nokia website for the latest guides, additional  
information, downloads, and services related to your  
Nokia product. You may also download free  
configuration settings such as MMS, GPRS, e-mail, and  
other services for your device model at www.nokia-  
asia.com/phonesettings.  
If you need to contact customer service, check the list  
of local Nokia Care contact centres at www.nokia-  
asia.com/contactus.  
For maintenance services, check your nearest Nokia  
service centre at www.nokia-asia.com/repair.  
1 9  
   
Y o u r N o k i a E 5 1  
The images in this guide may differ from your device  
display.  
Settings wizard configures your device for settings  
based on your network operator information. To use  
these services, you may have to contact your service  
provider to activate a data connection or other  
services.  
W e l c o m e  
The availability of the different settings items in  
Settings wizard depends on the features of the device,  
SIM card, wireless service provider, and the availability  
of the data in the Settings wizard database.  
When you switch on your device for the first time, the  
Welcome application opens. Select from the following:  
T u t o r i a l provides information about your device  
and shows you how to use it.  
If Settings wizard is not available from your service  
provider, it may not appear in the menu of your device.  
S w i t c h enables you to transfer content, such as  
contacts and calendar entries, from a compatible  
Nokia device. See "Transfer content between  
devices," p. 23.  
To start the wizard, select S t a r t . When you use the  
wizard for the first time, you are guided through the  
settings configuration. If there is no SIM card inserted,  
you need to select the home country of your service  
provider, and your service provider. If the country or  
service provider suggested by the wizard is not correct,  
select the correct one from the list. If the settings  
configuration is interrupted, the settings are not  
defined.  
S e t t i n g s w i z a r d helps you configure various  
settings. See "Settings wizard," p. 20.  
O p e r a t o r contains a link to your operator's home  
portal.  
To open the Welcome application later, select M e n u >  
H e l p > W e l c o m e .  
To access the main view of the Settings wizard after  
the wizard has finished the settings configuration,  
select O K .  
The available items may vary between regions.  
In the main view, select O p t i o n s and from the  
S e t t i n g s w i z a r d  
following:  
2 0  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t . w i z a r d .  
         
O p e r a t o r — Configure operator-specific settings  
such as MMS, internet, WAP, and streaming settings.  
E - m a i l s e t t i n g s — Configure e-mail settings.  
P u s h t o t a l k — Configure push-to-talk settings.  
V i d e o s h a r i n g — Configure video sharing settings.  
To change the functions of the selection keys in active  
standby, select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >  
G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n > S t a n d b y m o d e >  
S h o r t c u t s .  
To use the basic standby mode, select M e n u > T o o l s >  
S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n > S t a n d b y  
m o d e > A c t i v e s t a n d b y > O f f .  
If you are not able to use Settings wizard, visit the  
Nokia phone settings web site.  
S t a n d b y  
S t a n d b y m o d e s  
In the basic standby mode,  
you can see your service  
provider, time, and different  
indicators, such as  
Your device has two different standby modes: active  
standby mode and standby mode.  
indicators for alarms.  
A c t i v e s t a n d b y  
To view the most recently  
dialled numbers, press the  
call key. Scroll to a number  
or name, and press the call  
key again to call the number.  
After you have switched on  
your device and it is ready  
for use, but you have not  
entered any characters or  
made other selections, the  
device is in the active  
To call your voice mailbox  
(network service), press and  
hold 1 .  
To view calendar information, scroll right.  
To write and send text messages, scroll left.  
To change these shortcuts, select M e n u > T o o l s >  
S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n > S t a n d b y  
m o d e > S h o r t c u t s .  
standby mode. In the active  
standby mode, you can view  
different indicators such as  
network operator indicators  
or indicators for alarms, and  
applications you want to  
access fast.  
To select applications that  
you want to access from active standby, select M e n u >  
T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n >  
S t a n d b y m o d e > A c t i v e s t a n d b y a p p s . .  
2 1  
       
To rearrange the folder, scroll to the application you  
want to move, and select O p t i o n s > M o v e . A check  
mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new  
location, and select O K .  
M e n u  
Select M e n u .  
The menu is a starting point  
from which you can open all  
applications in the device or  
on a memory card.  
To move an application to a different folder, scroll to  
the application you want to move, and select  
O p t i o n s > M o v e t o f o l d e r , the new folder, and O K .  
To download applications from the web, select  
The menu contains  
O p t i o n s > D o w n l o a d a p p l i c a t i o n s .  
applications and folders,  
which are groups of similar  
applications. All  
applications you install in  
the device yourself are by  
default saved in the  
C o m m o n a c t i o n s i n  
s e v e r a l a p p l i c a t i o n s  
I n s t a l l a t i o n s folder.  
You can find the following actions in several  
To open an application,  
scroll to it, and press the  
scroll key.  
applications:  
To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device,  
press the power key briefly.  
To view the applications in a list, select O p t i o n s >  
C h a n g e v i e w > L i s t v i e w . To return to the grid view,  
select O p t i o n s > C h a n g e v i e w > G r i d v i e w .  
If an application consists of  
several tabs (see figure),  
open a tab by scrolling right  
or left.  
To make the application icons and folders animated,  
select O p t i o n s > I c o n a n i m a t i o n > O n .  
To save the settings that you  
To view the memory consumption of different  
applications and data stored on the device or memory  
card and to check the amount of free memory, select  
O p t i o n s > M e m o r y d e t a i l s .  
have configured in an  
application, select B a c k .  
To save a file, select  
O p t i o n s > S a v e . There are  
different saving options  
depending on the  
To create a new folder, select O p t i o n s > N e w  
f o l d e r .  
To rename a new folder, select O p t i o n s > R e n a m e .  
application you use.  
2 2  
       
To send a file, select O p t i o n s > S e n d . You can send a you can also synchronise data between the two devices  
file in an e-mail or multimedia message, or using  
or send data from this device to the other device.  
Bluetooth connectivity or infrared.  
When you transfer data from your previous device, it  
may require youto insert the SIM card. Your new Eseries  
device does not need a SIM card when transferring  
data.  
To copy, press and hold the shift key, and select the text  
with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and  
select C o p y . To paste, scroll to where you want to paste  
the text, press and hold the shift key, and select  
P a s t e . This method may not work in applications that  
have their own copy and paste commands.  
Content is copied from the memory of the other device  
to the corresponding location in your device. Copying  
time depends on the amount of data to be transferred.  
You can also cancel and continue later.  
To select different items, such as messages, files, or  
contacts, scroll to the item you want to select. Select  
O p t i o n s > M a r k / U n m a r k > M a r k to select one item  
or O p t i o n s > M a r k / U n m a r k > M a r k a l l to select all  
items.  
The necessary steps for data transfer may vary  
depending on your device, and whether you have  
interrupted data transfer earlier. The items that you  
can transfer vary depending on the other device.  
T i p : To select almost all items, first select  
O p t i o n s > M a r k / U n m a r k > M a r k a l l , then  
select the items you do not want, and O p t i o n s >  
M a r k / U n m a r k > U n m a r k .  
T r a n s f e r c o n t e n t b e t w e e n  
d e v i c e s  
To select an object (for example, an attachment in a  
document) scroll to the object so that square markers  
appear on each side of the object.  
To connect the two devices, follow the instructions on  
the display. For some device models, the Transfer  
application is sent to the other device as a message. To  
install Transfer on the other device, open the message,  
and follow the instructions on the display. On your new  
Eseries device, select the content you want to copy  
from the other device.  
T r a n s f e r  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S w i t c h .  
After the data transfer, you can save the shortcut with  
the transfer settings to the main view to repeat the  
same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select  
O p t i o n s > S h o r t c u t s e t t i n g s .  
You can transfer content, such as contacts, from a  
compatible Nokia device to your new Eseries device  
using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared. The type of  
content that can be transferred depends on the device  
model. If the other device supports synchronisation,  
2 3  
     
V i e w t r a n s f e r l o g  
P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n  
A transfer log is shown after every transfer.  
You can personalise your device by adjusting the  
various tones, background images, and screen savers,  
for example.  
To view the transfer details, scroll to the transferred  
item in the log, and select O p t i o n s > D e t a i l s .  
To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a  
transfer shortcut, if available, in the main view, and  
select O p t i o n s > V i e w l o g .  
P r o f i l e s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > P r o f i l e s .  
Any unresolved transfer conflicts are also displayed in  
the log view. To start solving conflicts, select  
O p t i o n s > S o l v e c o n f l i c t s .  
You can adjust and customise the ringing tones, alert  
tones, and other device tones for different events,  
environments, or caller groups. The profile currently in  
use is shown at the top of the display in the standby  
mode. However, if the active profile is General, only  
today's date is shown.  
S y n c h r o n i s e , r e t r i e v e , a n d  
s e n d d a t a  
If you have previously transferred data to your device  
with the Transfer application, select from the following  
icons in the Transfer main view:  
To create a new profile, select O p t i o n s > C r e a t e  
n e w , and define the settings.  
To customise a profile, select a profile and O p t i o n s >  
P e r s o n a l i s e .  
Synchronise data with a compatible device if the  
other device supports synchronisation. With  
synchronisation, you can keep the data up-to-date in  
both devices.  
To change a profile, select a profile and O p t i o n s >  
A c t i v a t e . The Offline profile prevents your device from  
accidentally switching on, sending or receiving  
messages, or using wireless LAN, Bluetooth, or FM  
radio; it also closes any internet connection that may  
be in operation when the profile is selected. The Offline  
profile does not prevent you from establishing a  
wireless LAN or Bluetooth connection at a later time,  
or from restarting the FM radio, so comply with any  
applicable safety requirements when establishing and  
using these features.  
Retrieve data from the other device to your new  
Eseries device.  
Send data from your new Eseries device to your  
other device.  
2 4  
           
To delete a profile that you created, select O p t i o n s >  
D e l e t e p r o f i l e . You cannot delete the predefined  
profiles.  
device sounds a ringing tone that is a combination  
of the spoken name of the contact and the selected  
ringing tone.  
R i n g i n g t y p e — Select how you want the ringing  
tone to alert.  
S e l e c t r i n g i n g t o n e s  
R i n g i n g v o l u m e — Select the volume level of the  
ringing tone.  
To set a ringing tone for a profile, select O p t i o n s >  
P e r s o n a l i s e > R i n g i n g t o n e . Select a ringing tone  
from the list, or select D o w n l o a d s o u n d s to open a  
bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for  
downloading tones using the browser. Any  
M e s s a g e a l e r t t o n e — Select a tone for received  
text messages.  
E - m a i l a l e r t t o n e — Select a tone for received e-  
mail messages.  
I M a l e r t t o n e — Select a tone for received instant  
messages.  
downloaded tones are saved to Gallery.  
To play the ringing tone for a selected contact group  
only, select O p t i o n s > P e r s o n a l i s e > A l e r t f o r , and  
select the desired group. Phone calls coming from  
outside that group have a silent alert.  
V i b r a t i n g a l e r t — Select whether you want the  
device to vibrate when you receive a call.  
K e y p a d t o n e s — Set the volume level of the device  
keypad tones.  
W a r n i n g t o n e s — Set the warning tones on or off.  
A l e r t f o r — You can set the device to ring only upon  
calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected  
contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that  
group have a silent alert.  
To change the message tone, select O p t i o n s >  
P e r s o n a l i s e > M e s s a g e a l e r t t o n e .  
C u s t o m i s e p r o f i l e s  
P r o f i l e n a m e — You can give a name to a new  
profile or rename an existing profile. The General  
and Offline profiles cannot be renamed.  
Select O p t i o n s > P e r s o n a l i s e , and define the  
following:  
R i n g i n g t o n e — Select a ringing tone from the list,  
or select D o w n l o a d s o u n d s to open a bookmark  
folder containing a list of bookmarks for  
downloading tones using the browser. If you have  
two alternate phone lines in use, you can specify a  
ringing tone for each line.  
C h a n g e t h e d i s p l a y t h e m e  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > T h e m e s .  
V i d e o c a l l t o n e — Select a ringing tone for video  
calls.  
To change the theme used in all applications, select the  
G e n e r a l folder.  
2 5  
S a y c a l l e r ' s n a m e — When you select this option  
and someone from your contacts list calls you, the  
           
To change the theme used in the main menu, select the To play the sound before activating it, select O p t i o n s >  
M e n u v i e w folder. P l a y v o i c e .  
To change the theme for a particular application, select To create a new audio theme, select O p t i o n s > S a v e  
the application-specific folder.  
t h e m e .  
To change the background image for the standby  
To add 3-D effects to the audio theme, select O p t i o n s >  
mode, select the W a l l p a p e r folder.  
3 - D r i n g i n g t o n e s .  
To select an image or write a text for the screen saver, To set speech as the sound for an event, select  
select the P o w e r s a v e r folder.  
S p e e c h . Enter the desired text to the text field. The  
S p e e c h option is not available if you have set S a y  
c a l l e r ' s n a m e on in the current profile.  
To select a language for the speech, select O p t i o n s >  
D o w n l o a d a t h e m e  
To download a theme, select O p t i o n s > D o w n l o a d > S e t S p e e c h l a n g u a g e .  
D o w n l o a d t h e m e s . Enter the link from which you  
To use all the preset sounds in an event group, scroll to  
want to download your theme. Once the theme is  
the group, and select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e s o u n d s .  
downloaded, you can preview, activate, or edit it.  
To silence all the sounds in an event group, select  
To preview a theme, select O p t i o n s > P r e v i e w .  
O p t i o n s > D e a c t i v a t e s o u n d s .  
To start using the selected theme, select O p t i o n s >  
S e t .  
3 - D r i n g i n g t o n e s  
Select M e n u > M e d i a > 3 - D r i n g i n g t o n e s .  
C h a n g e a u d i o t h e m e s  
To enable three-dimensional sound effects for ringing  
tones, select 3 - D r i n g i n g t o n e e f f e c t s > O n . Not all  
ringing tones support 3–D effects.  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > T h e m e s > A u d i o t h e m e .  
You can set sounds for various device events. The  
sounds can be tones, speech, or a combination of both.  
To change the 3–D effect that is applied to the ringing  
To change the current audio theme, select A c t i v e  
tone, select S o u n d t r a j e c t o r y and the desired effect.  
a u d i o t h e m e .  
To modify the 3–D effect, select from the following:  
To set a sound for an event, open an event group, such  
as ringing tones, scroll to the desired event, and press  
the scroll key.  
T r a j e c t o r y s p e e d — Select the speed at which  
sound moves from one direction to another. This  
setting is not available for all effects.  
2 6  
           
R e v e r b e r a t i o n — To adjust the amount of echo,  
select the desired effect.  
D o p p l e r e f f e c t — Select O n to have the ringing tone  
sound higher when you are closer to your device,  
and lower when you are farther away. This setting  
is not available for all effects.  
To listen to the ringing tone with the 3–D effect, select  
1 — Home key  
2 — Contacts key  
3 — E-mail key  
4 — Calendar key  
O p t i o n s > P l a y t o n e .  
To adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select  
M e n u > T o o l s > P r o f i l e s > O p t i o n s >  
P e r s o n a l i s e > R i n g i n g v o l u m e .  
H o m e k e y  
To access the main menu, press the home key briefly.  
Press the home key briefly again to access the active  
standby.  
V o l u m e c o n t r o l  
To adjust the earpiece volume during a phone call or  
the volume of the media applications, use the volume  
keys.  
To view the list of active applications, press the home  
key for a few seconds. When the list is open, press the  
home key briefly to scroll the list. To open the selected  
application, press the home key for a few seconds, or  
press the scroll key. To close the selected application,  
press the backspace key.  
O n e - t o u c h k e y s  
With the One-touch keys you can access applications  
and tasks quickly. Each key has been assigned an  
application and a task. To change these, select M e n u >  
T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n >  
O n e - t o u c h k e y s . Your network operator may have  
assigned applications to the keys, in which case you  
cannot change them.  
Leaving applications running in the background  
increases the demand on battery power and reduces  
the battery life.  
C o n t a c t s k e y  
To open the Contacts application, press the contacts  
key briefly.  
2 7  
           
To create a new contact, press the contacts key for a  
few seconds.  
access the menu, and open the Web application.  
Select a bookmark or enter the web address  
manually, and select G o t o . To return to your  
message, press and hold the home key, scroll to  
the message and press the scroll key.  
C a l e n d a r k e y  
To open the Calendar application, press the calendar  
key briefly.  
M e m o r y  
To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key  
for a few seconds.  
There are two types of memory into which you can save  
data or install applications: device memory and  
memory card.  
E - m a i l k e y  
To open your default mailbox, press the e-mail key  
briefly.  
F r e e m e m o r y  
To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key  
for a few seconds.  
To see how much memory is currently in use, how  
much free memory remains, and how much memory is  
consumed by each data type, select M e n u >  
O p t i o n s > M e m o r y d e t a i l s > P h o n e m e m o r y or  
M e m o r y c a r d .  
M u l t i t a s k i n g  
T i p : To ensure that you have adequate memory,  
transfer data regularly to a memory card or  
computer, or use File manager to delete files you  
no longer need.  
You can have several applications open at the same  
time. To switch between active applications, press and  
hold the home key, scroll to an application, and press  
the scroll key. To close the selected application, press  
the backspace key.  
After you install applications to a compatible memory  
card, installation files (.sis) remain in the device  
memory. The files may use large amounts of memory  
and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain  
sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up  
installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file  
manager to remove the installation files from the  
device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment,  
delete the message from the Messaging inbox.  
E x a m p l e : When you have an active phone call  
and want to check your calendar, press the home  
key to access the menu, and open the Calendar  
application. The phone call remains active in the  
background.  
E x a m p l e : When you are writing a message and  
2 8  
want to check a web site, press the home key to  
                 
M e m o r y c a r d  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > M e m o r y .  
If you cannot use a memory card in your device, you  
may have the wrong type of memory card, the card may  
not be formatted for your device, or the card has a  
corrupted file system. Your Nokia device supports the  
FAT16 and FAT32 file system for memory cards.  
2. Insert the memory card in the slot with the contact  
area first. Make sure that the contact area is facing  
the connectors on the device.  
M i c r o S D  
This device uses a microSD memory card.  
To ensure interoperability, use only  
compatible microSD cards with this device.  
Check the compatibility of a microSD card with its  
manufacturer or provider. Other memory cards than  
microSD cards are not compatible with this device.  
Using an incompatible memory card may damage the  
memory card as well as the device, and data stored on  
the incompatible card may be corrupted.  
3. Push the card in until it locks into place.  
4. Close the back cover.  
I n s e r t t h e m e m o r y c a r d  
Use a memory card to save the memory on your device.  
You can also back up information from your device to  
the memory card.  
U s e a m e m o r y c a r d  
To format a memory card for your device, select  
O p t i o n s > F o r m a t m e m o r y c a r d . When a memory  
card is formatted, all data on the card is lost  
The sales package of your device may not include a  
memory card. Memory cards are available as separate  
enhancements.  
permanently. Consult your retailer to find out if you  
must format the memory card before you can use it.  
1. With the back of the device facing you, press the  
release button (1) and slide the back cover off (2).  
To change the name of the memory card, select  
O p t i o n s > M e m o r y c a r d n a m e .  
You can protect a memory card with a password to  
2 9  
prevent unauthorised access. To set a password, select  
             
O p t i o n s > S e t p a s s w o r d . The password can be up to  
eight characters long and is case-sensitive. The  
password is stored in your device. You do not need to  
enter it again while you use the memory card in the  
same device. If you use the memory card in another  
device, you are asked for the password. Not all memory  
cards support password protection.  
W r i t e t e x t  
The input methods provided in the device may vary  
according to different sales markets.  
T r a d i t i o n a l t e x t i n p u t  
To remove the memory card password, select  
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e p a s s w o r d . When you remove the  
password, the data on the memory card is not  
protected against unauthorised use.  
is shown on the top right of the display when  
you are writing text using traditional text input.  
and  
indicate the selected case.  
indicates that the first letter of the sentence is written  
in uppercase and all the other letters are automatically  
To open a locked memory card, select O p t i o n s >  
U n l o c k m e m o r y c a r d . Enter the password.  
written in lowercase.  
indicates the number  
E j e c t t h e m e m o r y c a r d  
mode.  
To write text with the keypad, press a number key  
2 - 9 repeatedly until the desired character appears.  
There are more characters available for a number key  
than are printed on the key. If the next letter is located  
on the same key as the present one, wait until the  
cursor appears, and enter the letter.  
I m p o r t a n t : Do not remove the memory card in  
the middle of an operation when the card is being  
accessed. Removing the card in the middle of an  
operation may damage the memory card as well as the  
device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted.  
1. Press the power key briefly, and select R e m o v e  
To insert a number, press and hold the number key.  
m e m o r y c a r d .  
To switch between the upper and lower case mode and  
2. Press the release button and slide off the back  
the number mode, press # .  
cover.  
To erase a character, press the backspace key. Press and  
hold the backspace key to erase more than one  
character.  
3. Press the end of the memory card to release it from  
the memory card slot.  
4. Close the back cover.  
To access the most common punctuation marks, press  
the 1 key. Press 1 repeatedly to reach the desired  
punctuation mark.  
3 0  
       
To add special characters, press * . Scroll to the desired To switch predictive text input off for all editors in the  
character and press the scroll key.  
device, press # twice quickly.  
To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cursor to the  
next line, press 0 three times.  
C h a n g e t h e w r i t i n g  
l a n g u a g e  
To switch between the different character cases, press  
# .  
When you are writing text, you can change the writing  
language. For example, if you press the 6 key  
repeatedly to reach a specific character, changing the  
writing language gives you access to characters in a  
different order.  
P r e d i c t i v e t e x t i n p u t  
1. To activate predictive text input, press # twice  
quickly. This activates predictive text input for all  
editors in the device. The indicator  
on the display.  
is shown  
If you are writing text using a non-Latin alphabet and  
want to write Latin characters, for example e-mail or  
web addresses, you may need to change the writing  
language. To change the writing language, select  
O p t i o n s > W r i t i n g l a n g u a g e , and a writing  
language that uses Latin characters.  
2. To write the desired word, press 2 - 9 . Press each key  
only once for one letter.  
3. When you have finished writing the word and it is  
correct, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add  
a space.  
If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view  
A n t e n n a s  
the matching words the dictionary has found.  
If the ? character is shown after the word, the word  
you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To  
add a word to the dictionary, select S p e l l , enter the  
word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input,  
and select O K . The word is added to the dictionary.  
When the dictionary is full, the new word replaces  
the oldest added word.  
N o t e : Your device may have internal and  
external antennas. As with any radio transmitting  
device, avoid touching the antenna unnecessarily  
when the antenna is in use. Contact with such an  
antenna affects the communication quality, may cause  
the device to operate at a higher power level than  
otherwise needed and may reduce the battery life.  
Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it,  
scroll right. Write the last part of the compound word.  
To complete the compound word, press 0 to add a  
space.  
3 1  
           
F u r t h e r i n f o r m a t i o n  
E x t e n d e d u s e r g u i d e  
An extended version of this user guide is available on  
the Nokia web site. Some applications or functions are  
explained only in the extended user guide.  
I n s t r u c t i o n s i n y o u r d e v i c e  
To read instructions for the current view of the open  
application, select O p t i o n s > H e l p .  
To browse the help topics and conduct searches, select  
M e n u > H e l p > H e l p . You can select categories for  
which you want to see instructions. Select a category,  
such as Messaging, to see what instructions (help  
topics) are available. While you are reading the topic,  
scroll left or right to see the other topics in that  
category.  
To switch between the application and help, press and  
hold the home key.  
T u t o r i a l  
The tutorial provides you information about your  
device and shows you how to use it. Select M e n u >  
H e l p > T u t o r i a l .  
3 2  
 
B u s i n e s s c o m m u n i c a t i o n s  
Your device provides you with efficient tools for voice  
communication and contact and time management.  
To mute the ringing tone instead of answering a call,  
select S i l e n c e .  
When you have an active call and the call waiting  
function (network service) is activated, press the call  
key to answer a new incoming call. The first call is put  
on hold. To end the active call, press the end key.  
T e l e p h o n e  
To make and receive calls, the device must be switched  
on, the device must have a valid SIM card installed, and  
you must be located in the service area of a cellular  
network.  
M a k e a c a l l  
I m p o r t a n t : If the device has been locked, enter  
the lock code to activate the phone function. When the  
device is locked, calls may be possible to the official  
emergency number. Making an emergency call in the  
offline profile or when the device is locked requires  
that the device recognise the number to be an official  
emergency number. It is advisable to change the  
profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code  
before you make the emergency call.  
To make or receive a net call, your device must be  
connected to a net call service. To connect to a net call  
service, your device must be in the coverage of a  
connection network, such as a WLAN access point.  
V o i c e c a l l s  
N o t e : The actual invoice for calls and services  
from your service provider may vary, depending on  
network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and  
so forth.  
To make a call, enter the phone number, including the  
area code, and press the call key.  
T i p : For international calls, add the + character  
that replaces the international access code, and  
enter the country code, area code (omit the  
leading 0, if necessary), and phone number.  
A n s w e r a c a l l  
To answer a call, press the call key.  
To reject a call, press the end key.  
To end the call or cancel the call attempt, press the end  
3 3  
key.  
             
To make a call using the saved contacts, select  
C o n t a c t s in the standby mode. Enter the first letters of  
the name, scroll to the name, and press the call key.  
See "Contacts," p. 42.  
F a x c a l l s  
To make and receive fax calls, connect your device to a  
compatible computer or fax machine. To activate the  
fax modem, select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e m o d e m . You  
can answer incoming fax calls only from the computer  
or fax machine connected to your device.  
To make a call using the log, press the call key to view  
up to 20 numbers that you last called or attempted to  
call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press  
the call key. See "Log," p. 41.  
To reject an incoming fax call, select O p t i o n s >  
R e j e c t .  
To adjust the volume of an active call, use the volume  
To reject a call while a fax call is in progress, select  
keys.  
R e j e c t .  
To switch from a voice call to a video call, select  
O p t i o n s > S w i t c h t o v i d e o c a l l . The device ends the  
voice call and makes a video call to the recipient.  
A fax call cannot be put on hold.  
V i d e o c a l l s  
M a k e a c o n f e r e n c e c a l l  
To be able to make a video call, you need to be in the  
coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and  
subscription to video call services, contact your  
network operator or service provider. While talking,  
you can see a real-time, two-way video between you  
and the recipient of the call, if the recipient has a  
compatible mobile phone. The video image captured  
by the camera in your device is shown to the video call  
recipient. A video call can only be made between two  
parties.  
1. To make a conference call, enter a participant's  
phone number, and press the call key.  
2. When the participant answers, select O p t i o n s >  
N e w c a l l .  
3. When you have made a phone call to all the  
participants, select O p t i o n s > C o n f e r e n c e to  
merge the calls into a conference call.  
To mute the microphone of your device during the call,  
select O p t i o n s > M u t e .  
To drop a participant from the conference call, scroll to  
the participant, and select O p t i o n s > C o n f e r e n c e >  
D r o p p a r t i c i p a n t .  
M a k e a v i d e o c a l l  
W a r n i n g : Do not hold the device near your ear  
when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume  
may be extremely loud.  
To discuss privately with a conference call participant,  
scroll to the participant, and select O p t i o n s >  
C o n f e r e n c e > P r i v a t e .  
To make a video call, enter the phone number or select  
3 4  
the recipient of the call from Contacts, and select  
             
O p t i o n s > C a l l > V i d e o c a l l . When the video call  
starts, the camera of the device is activated. If the  
camera is already in use, video sending is disabled. If  
the recipient of the call does not want to send a video  
back to you, a still image is shown instead. You can  
define the still image in M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >  
P h o n e > C a l l > I m a g e i n v i d e o c a l l .  
To disable the sending of audio, video, or video and  
audio, select O p t i o n s > D i s a b l e > S e n d i n g a u d i o ,  
S e n d i n g v i d e o , or S e n d i n g a u d . & v i d e o .  
2. To send live video or a video clip from your device,  
select O p t i o n s > S h a r e v i d e o > L i v e or C l i p . To  
preview the clip, select O p t i o n s > P l a y .  
3. Select the recipient from Contacts, or enter the  
recipient's SIP address manually to send an  
invitation to the recipient. Sharing begins  
automatically when the recipient accepts the video  
sharing.  
4. To end sharing the video, select S t o p . The voice call  
continues normally.  
To use the loudspeaker for receiving audio, select  
O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e l o u d s p e a k e r . To mute the  
loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select O p t i o n s >  
A c t i v a t e h a n d s e t .  
R e c e i v e a v i d e o s h a r i n g i n v i t a t i o n  
When you receive a video sharing invitation, a message  
is displayed showing the caller's name or SIP address.  
To swap the places of images, select O p t i o n s >  
To accept the invitation and begin the sharing session,  
C h a n g e i m a g e o r d e r .  
select A c c e p t .  
To zoom the image on the display, select O p t i o n s >  
To reject the invitation, select R e j e c t . The voice call  
Z o o m i n or Z o o m o u t .  
continues normally.  
To end the video call and make a new voice call to the  
same recipient, select O p t i o n s > S w i t c h t o v o i c e  
c a l l .  
N e t c a l l s  
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > I n t e r n e t t e l . .  
S h a r e a v i d e o  
Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net  
calls). Your device attempts emergency calls primarily  
over cellular networks. If an emergency call using  
cellular networks is not successful, your device  
attempts an emergency call through your net call  
provider. Due to the established nature of cellular  
telephony, you should use cellular networks for  
emergency calls, if possible. If you have cellular  
network coverage available, make sure that your  
cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls  
Use Video sharing (network service) to send live video  
or a video clip from your mobile device to another  
compatible mobile device during a voice call.  
1. Make a phone call to the selected recipient. You can  
start sharing a video once the phone call is  
established and your device has been registered to  
the SIP server.  
3 5  
         
before you attempt an emergency call. The capability  
for an emergency call using internet telephony  
To login to the net call service manually, select  
R e g i s t r a t i o n > W h e n n e e d e d in the SIP settings  
depends on the availability of a WLAN and your net call when creating a net call profile.  
provider's implementation of emergency call  
To make secure net calls, ask your service provider for  
capabilities. Contact your net call provider to check the  
secure net call settings. The proxy server selected for  
internet telephony emergency call capability.  
the net call profile must support secure net calls.  
With the net call service (network service), you can  
make and receive calls over the internet using the VoIP  
(voice over internet protocol) technology. Net calls can  
be established between computers, between mobile  
phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional  
telephone. To make or receive a net call, your device  
must be within WLAN coverage, for example. The  
availability of the net call service may vary according  
to your country or area.  
C o n n e c t t o t h e n e t c a l l s e r v i c e  
To make or receive a net call, your device must be  
connected to a net call service. If you have selected  
automatic login, your device automatically connects to  
the net call service. If you login to the service manually,  
select an available network from the list and S e l e c t .  
The list of networks is refreshed automatically every 15  
seconds. To refresh the list manually, select O p t i o n s >  
R e f r e s h . Use this option if your WLAN is not shown on  
the list.  
To select a net call service for outgoing calls if the  
device is connected to more than one service, select  
O p t i o n s > C h a n g e s e r v i c e .  
To configure new services, select O p t i o n s >  
C o n f i g u r e s e r v i c e . This option is shown only if there  
are services that have not been configured.  
C r e a t e a n e t c a l l p r o f i l e  
Before you can make net calls, you need to create a net  
call profile.  
1. Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >  
C o n n e c t i o n > S I P s e t t i n g s > O p t i o n s > N e w  
S I P p r o f i l e , and enter the required information. To  
make the login to the net call service automatic,  
select R e g i s t r a t i o n > A l w a y s o n . Contact your net  
call provider for the correct settings.  
To save the network to which you are currently  
connected, select O p t i o n s > S a v e n e t w o r k . The  
saved networks are marked with a star on the list of  
networks.  
2. Select B a c k until you return to the C o n n e c t i o n  
settings main view.  
3. Select I n t e r n e t t e l . > O p t i o n s > N e w p r o f i l e .  
Enter a name for the profile, and select the SIP  
profile you just created.  
To connect to a net call service using a hidden WLAN,  
select O p t i o n s > U s e h i d d e n n e t w o r k .  
To set the created profile to be used automatically  
when connecting to the net call service, select M e n u >  
C o n n e c t i v i t y > I n t e r n e t t e l . > P r e f e r r e d p r o f i l e .  
To end the connection to a net call service, select  
3 6  
O p t i o n s > D i s c o n n e c t f r o m s e r v . .  
       
To define the service-specific settings, select E d i t  
s e r v i c e s e t t i n g s . This option is only available if a  
service-specific software plug-in has been installed in  
the device.  
M a k e n e t c a l l s  
You can make a net call from all applications where you  
can make a regular voice call. For example in Contacts,  
scroll to the desired contact, and select C a l l > I n t e r n e t  
c a l l .  
S p e e d d i a l l i n g  
To make a net call in the standby mode, enter the SIP  
address, and press the call key.  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e > C a l l >  
S p e e d d i a l l i n g > O n .  
To make a net call to an address that does not start with  
a digit, press any number key when the device is in the  
standby mode, then press # for a few seconds to clear  
the display and to switch the device from the number  
mode to the letter mode. Enter the address, and press  
the call key.  
Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing  
and holding a number key in the standby mode.  
To assign a number key to a phone number, select  
M e n u > T o o l s > S p e e d d i a l . Scroll to the number key  
(2 - 9) on the display, and select O p t i o n s > A s s i g n .  
Select the desired number from Contacts.  
To set net call as the preferred call type for outgoing  
calls, select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > I n t e r n e t t e l . >  
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > D e f a u l t c a l l t y p e > I n t e r n e t  
c a l l . When your device is connected to a net call service,  
all calls are made as net calls.  
To delete the phone number assigned to a number key,  
scroll to the speed dialling key, and select O p t i o n s >  
R e m o v e .  
To modify a phone number assigned to a number key,  
scroll to the speed dialling key, and select O p t i o n s >  
C h a n g e .  
N e t c a l l s e r v i c e s e t t i n g s  
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > S e t t i n g s : .  
To login automatically to the net call service, select  
L o g i n t y p e > A u t o m a t i c . If you use the automatic  
login type for WLANs, the device periodically scans for  
WLANs, which increases the demand on battery power  
and reduces the battery life.  
C a l l d i v e r t  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e > C a l l  
d i v e r t .  
Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to  
another phone number. For details, contact your  
service provider.  
To login manually to the net call service, select L o g i n  
t y p e > M a n u a l .  
To view the networks you have saved for the net call  
service and the networks detected by the net call  
service, select S a v e d c o n n . n e t w o r k s .  
Select to divert voice or fax calls, and select from the  
3 7  
following options:  
               
A l l v o i c e c a l l s or A l l f a x c a l l s — Divert all incoming you need the barring password from your service  
provider. Call barring affects all call types.  
voice or fax calls.  
I f b u s y — Divert incoming calls when you have an  
active call.  
Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the  
same time.  
I f n o t a n s w e r e d — Divert incoming calls after your  
device rings for a specified period of time. Select the  
time you let the device ring before diverting the call  
in the D e l a y t i m e : list.  
When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain  
official emergency numbers.  
To bar calls, select V o i c e c a l l b a r r i n g and from the  
following options:  
I f o u t o f r e a c h — Divert calls when the device is  
switched off or out of network coverage.  
I f n o t a v a i l a b l e — Activate the last three settings  
at the same time. This option diverts calls if your  
device is busy, not answered, or out of reach.  
O u t g o i n g c a l l s — Prevent making voice calls with  
your device.  
I n c o m i n g c a l l s — Prevent incoming calls.  
I n t e r n a t i o n a l c a l l s — Prevent calling to foreign  
countries or regions.  
To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type  
and a diverting option, then select O p t i o n s >  
A c t i v a t e > T o v o i c e m a i l b o x .  
I n c o m i n g c a l l s w h e n a b r o a d — Prevent incoming  
calls when outside your home country.  
I n t e r n a t i o n a l c a l l s e x c e p t t o h o m e  
c o u n t r y — Prevent calls to foreign countries or  
regions, but allow calls to your home country.  
To divert calls to another phone number, select a call  
type and a diverting option, then select O p t i o n s >  
A c t i v a t e > D i v e r t e d t o : . Enter a number in the  
N u m b e r : field, or select F i n d to retrieve a number  
saved in Contacts.  
To check the status of voice call barrings, select the  
barring option and O p t i o n s > C h e c k s t a t u s .  
To stop all voice call barrings, select a barring option  
To check the current diverting status, scroll to the  
and O p t i o n s > C a n c e l a l l b a r r i n g s .  
diverting option, and select O p t i o n s > C h e c k s t a t u s .  
To change the password used for barring voice and fax  
calls, select V o i c e c a l l b a r r i n g > O p t i o n s > E d i t  
b a r r i n g p a s s w o r d . Enter the current code, then the  
new code twice. The barring password must be four  
digits long. For details, contact your service provider.  
To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option,  
and select O p t i o n s > C a n c e l .  
C a l l b a r r i n g  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e > C a l l  
b a r r i n g .  
B a r n e t c a l l s  
You can bar the calls that can be made or received with  
3 8  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e > C a l l  
the device (network service). To change the settings,  
b a r r i n g > I n t e r n e t c a l l b a r r i n g .  
       
To reject net calls from anonymous callers, select  
If you have configured net call settings to your device  
and have an internet call mailbox, select I n t e r n e t c a l l  
m a i l b o x > O p t i o n s > C a l l v o i c e m a i l b o x to call it.  
A n o n y m o u s c a l l b a r r i n g > O n .  
To call your voice mail in the standby mode, press and  
hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. If you have  
defined an internet call mailbox, select whether you  
want to call your voice mail or internet call mailbox.  
S e n d D T M F t o n e s  
You can send dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) tones  
during an active call to control your voice mailbox or  
other automated phone services.  
To change the voice mailbox number, select the  
S e n d a D T M F t o n e s e q u e n c e  
mailbox and O p t i o n s > C h a n g e n u m b e r .  
1. Make a call, and wait until the other end answers.  
2. Select M e n u > O p t i o n s > S e n d D T M F .  
To change the internet call mailbox address, select the  
mailbox and O p t i o n s > C h a n g e a d d r e s s .  
3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a  
predefined sequence.  
V o i c e a i d  
A t t a c h a D T M F t o n e s e q u e n c e t o a c o n t a c t c a r d  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > V o i c e a i d .  
1. Select M e n u > C o n t a c t s . Open a contact, and  
select O p t i o n s > E d i t > O p t i o n s > A d d d e t a i l >  
D T M F .  
The Voice aid application reads text on the display,  
allowing you to use the basic functions of your device  
without looking at the display.  
2. Enter the tone sequence. To insert a pause of about  
2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p .  
To set the device to send the DTMF tones only after  
you select S e n d D T M F during a call, enter w .  
To hear the entries in your contacts list, select  
C o n t a c t s . Do not use this option if you have more than  
500 contacts.  
3. Select D o n e .  
To hear information on your missed and received calls,  
dialled numbers, and frequent calls, select R e c e n t  
c a l l s .  
V o i c e m a i l  
To listen to your voice messages, select V o i c e  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > C a l l m a i l b o x .  
m a i l b o x .  
When you open the Voice mail application for the first  
time, you are asked to enter the number of your voice  
mailbox.  
To dial a telephone number, select D i a l l e r .  
To hear the current time, select C l o c k > T i m e . To hear  
the current date, select C l o c k > D a t e .  
3 9  
To call your voice mail, select O p t i o n s > C a l l v o i c e  
m a i l b o x .  
           
To hear more options, select O p t i o n s .  
3. The device plays a synthesised voice tag for the  
recognised contact in the selected device language,  
and displays the name and number. After a timeout  
of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the  
recognised contact was not correct, select N e x t to  
view a list of other matches or Q u i t to cancel  
dialling.  
V o i c e c o m m a n d s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > V o i c e c o m m . .  
Use voice commands to make phone calls and launch  
If several numbers are saved under the contact, the  
device selects the default number, if it has been set.  
Otherwise, the device selects the first available  
number of the following fields: M o b i l e , M o b i l e  
( h o m e ) , M o b i l e ( b u s i n e s s ) , T e l e p h o n e , T e l .  
( h o m e ) , and T e l . ( b u s i n e s s ) .  
applications, profiles, or other functions on the device.  
The device creates a voice tag for the entries in Contacts  
and for the functions designated in the Voice  
commands application. When a voice command is  
spoken, the device compares the spoken words to the  
voice tag in the device. Voice commands are not  
dependent on a speaker’s voice; however, the voice  
recognition in the device adapts to the main user’s  
voice to recognise voice commands better.  
L a u n c h a n a p p l i c a t i o n  
The device creates voice tags for the applications listed  
in the Voice commands application.  
M a k e a c a l l  
To launch an application using a voice command, press  
and hold the voice key, and clearly speak the name of  
the application. If the recognised application was not  
correct, select N e x t to view a list of other matches or  
Q u i t to cancel.  
A voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that  
is saved on the contact in Contacts.  
N o t e : Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy  
environment or during an emergency, so you should  
not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances.  
To add more applications to the list, select O p t i o n s >  
N e w a p p l i c a t i o n .  
To listen to a voice tag, open a contact, and select  
To change the voice command of an application, select  
O p t i o n s > C h a n g e c o m m a n d , and enter the new  
command.  
O p t i o n s > P l a y v o i c e t a g .  
1. To make a call using a voice command, press and  
hold the voice key.  
2. When you hear the tone or see the visual display,  
clearly speak the name saved on the contact.  
4 0  
         
T i p : To open D i a l l e d n u m b e r s in the standby  
C h a n g e p r o f i l e s  
modes, press the call key.  
The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To set  
on a profile using a voice command, press and hold the  
voice key, and say the name of the profile.  
To view the approximate duration of calls to and from  
your device, select C a l l d u r a t i o n .  
To view the amount of data transferred during packet  
To change the voice command, select P r o f i l e s >  
data connections, select P a c k e t d a t a .  
O p t i o n s > C h a n g e c o m m a n d .  
M o n i t o r a l l c o m m u n i c a t i o n s  
V o i c e c o m m a n d s e t t i n g s  
To switch off the synthesiser that plays recognised  
voice commands in the selected device language,  
select S e t t i n g s > S y n t h e s i s e r > O f f .  
To reset voice recognition learning when the main user  
of the device has changed, select R e m o v e v o i c e  
a d a p t s . .  
To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data  
connections registered by the device, open the general  
log tab.  
To view detailed information about a communication  
event, scroll to it, and press the scroll key.  
T i p : Subevents, such as a text message sent in  
more than one part and packet data  
connections, are logged as one communication  
event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia  
messaging centre, or web pages are shown as  
packet data connections.  
L o g  
Select M e n u > L o g .  
Log stores information about the communication  
history of the device. The device registers missed and  
received calls only if the network supports these  
functions, the device is switched on and within the  
network service area.  
To add the phone number from a communication event  
to Contacts, select O p t i o n s > S a v e t o C o n t a c t s , and  
select to create a new contact or to add the phone  
number to an existing contact.  
To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text  
message, select O p t i o n s > C o p y n u m b e r .  
C a l l a n d d a t a r e g i s t e r s  
To view a single type of communication event or  
communication events with one other party, select  
O p t i o n s > F i l t e r , and select the desired filter.  
To view recently missed, received, and dialled calls,  
select R e c e n t c a l l s .  
4 1  
                 
To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register,  
and messaging delivery reports permanently, select  
O p t i o n s > C l e a r l o g .  
messages to many recipients at the same time. You can  
add received contact information (business cards) to  
Contacts. Contact information can only be sent to or  
received from compatible devices.  
C a l l a n d s e n d m e s s a g e s f r o m  
L o g  
To call back a caller, select R e c e n t c a l l s and open  
M i s s e d c a l l s , R e c e i v e d c a l l s , or D i a l l e d n u m b e r s .  
Select the caller, and O p t i o n s > C a l l .  
C o p y c o n t a c t s b e t w e e n S I M  
a n d d e v i c e m e m o r y  
If you already have contacts saved on your SIM card,  
you can copy them to the device memory.  
To reply to a caller with a message, select R e c e n t  
c a l l s and open M i s s e d c a l l s , R e c e i v e d c a l l s , or D i a l l e d  
n u m b e r s . Select the caller, and select O p t i o n s >  
C r e a t e m e s s a g e . You can send text messages and  
multimedia messages.  
To copy contacts from a SIM card to the device memory,  
select O p t i o n s > S I M c o n t a c t s > S I M d i r e c t o r y . Mark  
the contacts to copy, or select O p t i o n s > M a r k /  
U n m a r k > M a r k a l l to copy all contacts. Select  
O p t i o n s > C o p y t o C o n t a c t s .  
To copy contacts from the device memory to a SIM card,  
select O p t i o n s > C o p y t o S I M d i r e c t o r y . Mark the  
contacts you want to copy, or select O p t i o n s > M a r k /  
U n m a r k > M a r k a l l to copy all contacts. Select  
O p t i o n s > C o p y t o S I M d i r e c t o r y .  
L o g s e t t i n g s  
To set the time for keeping all communication events  
in the log, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > L o g  
d u r a t i o n , and the time. If you select N o l o g , all log  
contents are permanently deleted.  
T i p : If you have saved contacts on your previous  
device, you can use the Transfer application to  
copy them. See "Transfer content between  
devices," p. 23.  
C o n t a c t s  
Select M e n u > C o n t a c t s .  
M a n a g e c o n t a c t s  
You can save and update contact information, such as  
phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses  
of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing tone  
or a thumbnail image to a contact. You can also create  
contact groups, which allow you to send text or e-mail  
To add a new contact, select O p t i o n s > N e w  
c o n t a c t .  
4 2  
                 
To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact, select To change the display order of the first and last names  
O p t i o n s > E d i t > O p t i o n s > A d d t h u m b n a i l . The  
of your contacts, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s , and L a s t  
thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls.  
n a m e F i r s t n a m e , or F i r s t n a m e L a s t n a m e .  
To listen to the voice tag assigned to the contact, select  
O p t i o n s > P l a y v o i c e t a g .  
M a n a g e c o n t a c t g r o u p s  
To search for a contact, enter the first letters of the  
name to the search field. A list of the contacts starting  
with the letters appear on the display.  
You can create a contact group so that you can send  
messages to several recipients at the same time.  
1. Open the contact groups tab, and select O p t i o n s >  
To edit information in a contact, select O p t i o n s >  
N e w g r o u p .  
E d i t .  
2. Enter a name for the group, and select O K .  
T i p : You can also use Nokia PC Suite to add and  
3. Open the group, and select O p t i o n s > A d d  
edit contacts.  
m e m b e r s .  
To send contact information, select O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
4. Scroll to each contact you want to add to the group,  
and press the scroll key to mark it.  
You can assign a default number or address to a contact  
so you can easily call or send a message to the default  
number or address, even if several numbers or  
addresses are saved to that contact. The default  
number is also used in voice dialling.  
5. Select O K to add all marked contacts to the group.  
To remove a contact from a contact group, scroll to the  
contact that you want to remove, and select O p t i o n s >  
R e m o v e f r o m g r o u p .  
To change the default information for a contact, open  
the contact, and select O p t i o n s > D e f a u l t s . Select the  
number or address you want to set as a default. The  
default number or address is underlined in the contact.  
A d d r i n g i n g t o n e s f o r  
c o n t a c t s  
You can select a ringing tone for a contact or contact  
group. If the caller's phone number is sent with the  
incoming call and your device recognises the number,  
the ringing tone plays when the contact calls you.  
To select a ringing tone for a contact or contact group,  
open the contact or contact group, and select  
O p t i o n s > R i n g i n g t o n e . A list of ringing tones opens.  
Select the ringing tone you want to use.  
To add a contact to a group, select O p t i o n s > A d d t o  
g r o u p (shown only if you have created a group).  
T i p : To check to which groups a contact belongs,  
select O p t i o n s > B e l o n g s t o g r o u p s .  
To add a speed dial key to the contact's phone number,  
select O p t i o n s > A s s i g n s p e e d d i a l .  
4 3  
       
To remove the assigned ringing tone, select D e f a u l t  
To add contacts to your SIM directory, select O p t i o n s >  
N e w S I M c o n t a c t . Enter the contact information and  
select D o n e .  
t o n e from the list of ringing tones.  
To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select  
O p t i o n s > S I M c o n t a c t s > F i x e d d i a l c o n t a c t s . This  
setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card.  
To restrict calls from your device to selected phone  
numbers, select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e f i x e d d i a l l i n g .  
You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate  
fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts.  
Contact your service provider if you do not have the  
code.  
S e n d b u s i n e s s c a r d s  
To send a business card, select the contact from  
Contacts, select O p t i o n s > S e n d , and the sending  
method. Enter the phone number or address, or add a  
recipient from Contacts. Select O p t i o n s > S e n d . If you  
select text message as the sending method, business  
cards are sent without thumbnail images.  
To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select  
O p t i o n s > N e w S I M c o n t a c t . You need the PIN2 code  
for this function. When you use fixed dialling, packet  
data connections are not possible, except when  
sending text messages over a packet data connection.  
In this case, the message centre number and the  
recipient's phone number must be included on the  
fixed dialling list. When fixed dialling is activated, calls  
may be possible to the official emergency number  
programmed into your device.  
M a n a g e r e c e i v e d b u s i n e s s  
c a r d s  
To view a received business card, select O p e n from the  
displayed notification, or open the message from the  
Inbox folder in the Messaging application.  
To save a received business card, select > S a v e  
b u s i n e s s c a r d .  
To view your own numbers, if stored on the SIM card,  
select O p t i o n s > M y n u m b e r s . For example, you may  
have subscribed to two phone lines with the same SIM  
card. Not all SIM cards contain your own numbers.  
S I M d i r e c t o r y  
Select O p t i o n s > S I M c o n t a c t s > S I M d i r e c t o r y .  
In the SIM directory, you can see the names and  
numbers stored on the SIM card; add, edit, or copy  
numbers to contacts; and make calls.  
To edit the contact information, select O p t i o n s >  
E d i t .  
To view a SIM contact, scroll to it, and press the scroll  
To copy the contact from the SIM directory to Contacts,  
key.  
select O p t i o n s > C o p y t o C o n t a c t s .  
4 4  
To check the amount of free memory on your SIM card,  
select O p t i o n s > S I M c a r d d e t a i l s .  
           
S t a r t d a t e or D a t e — Enter the start date or date  
the event occurs.  
C a l e n d a r  
E n d d a t e — Enter the end date.  
Select M e n u > C a l e n d a r .  
A l a r m — Set an alarm for meeting and anniversary  
entries. The alarm is displayed in the day view.  
R e p e a t — Specify whether you want the entry to be  
repeated and when. Define the repeat type,  
frequency, and possible ending date.  
You can create and view scheduled events and  
appointments. You can also set alarms for calendar  
entries. To synchronise your calendar data with a  
compatible computer, use Nokia PC Suite. See the Nokia  
PC Suite guide.  
S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n — If you select P r i v a t e , the  
calendar entry can be seen only by you and is not  
shown to others with online access to view the  
calendar. If you select P u b l i c , the calendar entry is  
shown to others who have access to view your  
calendar online. If you select N o n e , the calendar  
entry is not copied to your computer when you  
synchronise.  
C r e a t e c a l e n d a r e n t r i e s  
You can create the following types of calendar entries:  
M e e t i n g entries have a specific date and time.  
M e m o entries are related to the whole day but not  
to a specific time of the day.  
T i p : Make sure you have selected the correct city  
in the Clock application, because scheduled  
calendar entries may change when the current  
city is changed and is on another time zone.  
A n n i v e r s a r y entries remind you of birthdays and  
special dates. They refer to a certain day but not a  
specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are  
repeated every year.  
To edit an existing entry, scroll to the entry, and select  
T o - d o entries remind you of a task that has a due  
O p t i o n s > O p e n . Edit the details in the various fields.  
date but not a specific time of the day.  
To delete a calendar entry, select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e ,  
and select B e f o r e d a t e to delete all entries before the  
selected date, or A l l e n t r i e s to delete all calendar  
entries from the device.  
To create a calendar entry, scroll to a date, and select  
O p t i o n s > N e w e n t r y . Select the entry type. The  
available settings for meeting, memo, anniversary, and  
to-do entries vary.  
T i p : When you edit or delete a repeated entry,  
choose how you want the change to take effect.  
If you select A l l c a l e n d a r e n t r i e s d e l e t e d , all  
repeated entries are deleted. If you select D e l e t e  
e n t r y , only the current entry is deleted.  
Select from the following:  
S u b j e c t or O c c a s i o n — Enter a description for the  
entry.  
L o c a t i o n — Enter the location information.  
S t a r t t i m e — Enter the start time.  
E n d t i m e — Enter the end time.  
4 5  
     
To send a calendar entry to a compatible device, select  
O p t i o n s > S e n d > V i a t e x t m e s s a g e , V i a  
m u l t i m e d i a , V i a e - m a i l , V i a B l u e t o o t h , or V i a  
i n f r a r e d . If the other device is not compatible with  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the time  
information of received calendar entries may not be  
displayed correctly.  
online, or N o n e to prevent copying the entry to  
your computer when you synchronise.  
T o - d o e n t r i e s  
You can create and maintain a task or list of tasks that  
must be done by a certain day. Each task can be  
To add a received calendar entry to your calendar, open assigned a due date, and an alarm.  
the calendar entry attachment in the message, and  
C r e a t e a t o - d o e n t r y  
select O p t i o n s > S a v e t o C a l e n d a r .  
1. Scroll to a date, and select O p t i o n s > N e w  
To respond to a received calendar entry, select  
A c c e p t , T e n t a t i v e , or D e c l i n e , if available. If you  
accept the entry or mark it as tentative, the entry is  
added to your calendar. You can send a response to the  
sender of the calendar entry by e-mail. Select Y e s , and  
the message is saved in Outbox to wait for sending.  
e n t r y > T o - d o .  
2. Enter the subject in the S u b j e c t field.  
3. Enter the due date.  
4. To set an alarm for the to-do entry, select A l a r m >  
O n . Enter the alarm time and date.  
5. Specify a priority. The priority icons are ( ! ) H i g h  
and ( - ) L o w . There is no icon for N o r m a l .  
C r e a t e a m e e t i n g e n t r y  
6. Define how the entry is handled during  
synchronisation in the S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n field.  
Select P r i v a t e to hide the entry from viewers if the  
calendar is available online, P u b l i c to make the  
entry visible to viewers if the calendar is available  
online, or N o n e to not copy the entry to your  
computer when you synchronise.  
1. Scroll to a date, and select O p t i o n s > N e w  
e n t r y > M e e t i n g .  
2. Enter the subject, location, start and end time, and  
the start and end dates, if needed.  
3. To set an alarm for the meeting, select A l a r m >  
O n . Enter the alarm time and date.  
4. Select whether this is a repeating meeting.  
5. Define how the entry is handled during  
C a l e n d a r v i e w s  
synchronisation in the S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n field.  
Select P r i v a t e to hide the entry from viewers if the  
calendar is available online, P u b l i c to make the  
entry visible to viewers if the calendar is available  
The Calendar has four views: in the month view, you  
can see the entire month at one time; the week view  
shows the events for the selected week in seven day  
boxes; the day view shows the events for the selected  
4 6  
       
day; and the to-do view shows the to-do items for the  
selected day.  
D a y v i e w  
Select O p t i o n s > D a y v i e w .  
W o r k i n d i f f e r e n t v i e w s  
The day view shows the events for the selected day.  
Entries are grouped into time slots according to their  
starting time. To view the previous or next day, scroll  
left or right.  
To switch between the different calendar views, select  
O p t i o n s in any calendar view. Select the type of view  
from the list.  
To set the default calendar view, select O p t i o n s >  
T o - d o v i e w  
S e t t i n g s > D e f a u l t v i e w , and the view you want.  
Select O p t i o n s > T o - d o v i e w .  
To view a specific date, select O p t i o n s > G o t o d a t e ,  
The to-do view shows the to-do items for the selected  
and enter the date.  
day.  
To mark a task as completed, select O p t i o n s > M a r k  
M o n t h v i e w  
Select O p t i o n s > M o n t h v i e w .  
a s d o n e .  
To restore a task, select O p t i o n s > M a r k a s n o t  
In the month view, you can see the entire month at one  
time. Each row shows one week of dates. The active  
month is displayed, and the active day is either today  
or the last day that was viewed. The active day is  
marked with a coloured square. Days that have  
scheduled events are marked with a small triangle.  
Press the scroll key to open the day's entry.  
d o n e .  
C a l e n d a r s e t t i n g s  
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .  
To change the alarm tone, select C a l e n d a r a l a r m  
t o n e .  
W e e k v i e w  
Select O p t i o n s > W e e k v i e w .  
To change the view displayed when you open the  
calendar, select D e f a u l t v i e w .  
The week view shows the events for the selected week  
in seven day boxes. Today's date is marked with a  
coloured square. Memos and anniversaries are placed  
before 8:00 a.m.  
To change the first day of the week, select W e e k s t a r t s  
o n .  
To change the week view title, select W e e k v i e w  
t i t l e and W e e k n u m b e r or W e e k d a t e s .  
To change the starting day of the week, select  
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > W e e k s t a r t s o n .  
4 7  
                     
transmission between the gateway and the content  
server.  
W e b  
Security certificates may be required for some services,  
such as banking services. You are notified if the identity  
of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the  
correct security certificate in your device. For more  
information, contact your service provider.  
Select M e n u > W e b .  
To browse the web (network service), you need to  
configure the internet access point settings. If you are  
using a GPRS connection, your wireless network must  
support GPRS, and the service must be activated for  
your SIM card.  
T i p : You may receive the internet access point  
settings from your service provider as a special  
text message or from the service provider's web  
pages. You can also enter the internet access  
point settings manually. See "Internet access  
points," p. 97.  
B r o w s e t h e w e b  
To browse the web, select a bookmark or enter the web  
address manually, and select G o t o . Use only services  
that you trust and that offer adequate security and  
protection against harmful software.  
T i p : When you start to enter the address, the  
addresses of the pages you have previously  
visited that match your input are displayed. To  
open a page, scroll to its address, and press the  
scroll key.  
Check the availability of services, pricing, and fees with  
your service provider. Service providers also give you  
instructions on how to use their services.  
If the web page is unreadable or not supported and  
garbage code is found while browsing, you can try to  
select M e n u > W e b > O p t i o n s > P a g e > D e f a u l t  
e n c o d i n g , and select a corresponding encoding.  
To move on a web page, use the scroll key, which is  
shown as a pointer on the page. When you move the  
pointer over a link, the pointer changes into a hand.  
Press the scroll key to open the link. On a web page,  
new links usually appear underlined in blue and  
previously visited links in purple. Images that act as  
links have a blue border around them.  
C o n n e c t i o n s e c u r i t y  
If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a  
connection, the data transmission between the device  
and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The  
security icon does not indicate that the data  
The addresses of the pages you visit are saved in the  
A u t o . b o o k m a r k s folder.  
transmission between the gateway and the content  
server (or place where the requested resource is  
stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data  
4 8  
         
B o o k m a r k s  
F e e d s a n d b l o g s  
Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links Select M e n u > W e b > W e b f e e d s .  
for third-party internet sites. You may also access other  
third-party sites through your device. Third-party sites  
are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does not  
endorse or assume liability for them. If you choose to  
access such sites, you should take precautions for  
security or content.  
Feeds usually contain headlines and articles, often  
about recent news or other topics. Blog is a shortening  
of weblog, which is a continuously updated web diary.  
To download a feed or blog, scroll to it, and press the  
scroll key.  
To add or edit a feed or blog, select O p t i o n s > M a n a g e  
To view a bookmarked web page, scroll to the  
f e e d > N e w f e e d or E d i t .  
bookmark, and press the scroll key.  
To browse to another web page, select O p t i o n s >  
N a v i g a t i o n o p t i o n s > G o t o w e b a d d r e s s , enter the  
page address, and select G o t o .  
E n d a c o n n e c t i o n  
To end the connection and view the browser page  
offline, select O p t i o n s > T o o l s > D i s c o n n e c t . To end  
the connection and close the browser, select  
O p t i o n s > E x i t .  
To add a bookmark, select O p t i o n s > B o o k m a r k  
m a n a g e r > A d d b o o k m a r k .  
To organise your bookmarks, select O p t i o n s >  
B o o k m a r k m a n a g e r in the Web main view. You can  
move and edit bookmarks, and create new folders.  
W e b s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > W e b > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .  
C l e a r t h e c a c h e  
The Web settings are divided into four groups:  
A cache is a memory location that is used to store data  
temporarily. If you have tried to access or have  
accessed confidential information requiring  
passwords, empty the cache after each use. The  
information or services you have accessed are stored  
in the cache.  
G e n e r a l contains access point and home page  
related settings.  
P a g e contains imaging, audio, and pop-up settings.  
P r i v a c y contains settings related your privacy.  
W e b f e e d s contains settings related to web feeds  
To empty the cache, select O p t i o n s > C l e a r p r i v a c y  
and blogs.  
d a t a > C l e a r c a c h e .  
4 9  
               
M e s s a g i n g  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .  
If not, you may need to define the settings manually;  
or contact your service provider to configure the  
settings.  
In Messaging (network service), you can send and  
receive text messages, multimedia messages, audio  
messages, and e-mail messages. You can also receive  
web service messages, cell broadcast messages, and  
special messages containing data, and send service  
commands.  
Messages and data received using Bluetooth  
connectivity or infrared are stored in the I n b o x folder.  
E-mail messages are stored in M a i l b o x . Messages that  
you have been writing can be stored in the D r a f t s  
folder. Messages that are waiting to be sent are stored  
in the O u t b o x folder, and messages that have been  
sent, excluding Bluetooth and infrared messages, are  
stored in the S e n t folder.  
Before sending or receiving messages, you may need  
to do the following:  
Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located  
in the service area of a cellular network.  
Verify that the network supports the messaging  
features you want to use and that they are activated  
on your SIM card.  
T i p : Messages are placed in Outbox, for example,  
when your device is outside network coverage.  
You can also schedule e-mail messages to be  
sent the next time you connect to your remote  
mailbox.  
Define the internet access point settings on the  
device. See "Internet access points," p. 97.  
Define the e-mail account settings on the device. See  
"E-mail account settings," p. 62.  
Define the text message settings on the device. See  
"Text message settings," p. 60.  
N o t e : The message sent icon or text on your  
device screen does not indicate that the message is  
received at the intended destination.  
To request the network to send you a delivery report  
of the text messages and multimedia messages you  
have sent (network service), select O p t i o n s >  
Define the multimedia message settings on the  
device. See "Multimedia message  
settings," p. 61.  
The device may recognise the SIM card provider and  
5 0  
automatically configure some of the message settings.  
     
S e t t i n g s > T e x t m e s s a g e or M u l t i m e d i a  
To start reading the next message in Inbox or mailbox,  
m e s s a g e > R e c e i v e r e p o r t . The reports are saved in scroll down. To start reading the message again, scroll  
the R e p o r t s folder.  
up. In the beginning of the message, scroll up to hear  
the previous message.  
To pause the reading, press the left selection key  
briefly. To continue, press the left selection key briefly  
again.  
To end the reading, press the end key.  
O r g a n i s e m e s s a g e s  
To create a new folder to organise your messages,  
select M y f o l d e r s > O p t i o n s > N e w f o l d e r .  
To rename a folder, select O p t i o n s > R e n a m e  
f o l d e r . You can only rename folders that you have  
created.  
S p e e c h  
To move a message to another folder, select O p t i o n s > Select M e n u > T o o l s > S p e e c h .  
M o v e t o f o l d e r , the folder, and O K .  
With Speech, you can set the language, voice, and voice  
properties for the message reader.  
To sort messages in a specific order, select O p t i o n s >  
S o r t b y . You can sort the messages by D a t e , S e n d e r ,  
S u b j e c t , or M e s s a g e t y p e .  
E d i t t h e v o i c e p r o p e r t i e s  
To view the properties of a message, select the  
To set the language for the message reader, select  
L a n g u a g e . To download additional languages to your  
device, visit the Nokia web site or use the Download!  
application.  
message and O p t i o n s > M e s s a g e d e t a i l s .  
M e s s a g e r e a d e r  
To set the speaking voice, select V o i c e . The voice is  
The message reader reads received text, multimedia,  
and e-mail messages aloud. The message reader  
cannot read e-mail messages in add-on e-mail  
applications.  
language-dependent.  
To set the speaking rate, select V o i c e s e t t i n g s >  
S p e e d .  
To set the speaking volume, select V o i c e s e t t i n g s >  
To play a message, press and hold the left selection key  
V o l u m e .  
when you receive a message.  
To listen to a voice, open the voice tab, select the voice,  
To start reading a message in Inbox or mailbox, select  
and select P l a y v o i c e .  
O p t i o n s > L i s t e n .  
5 1  
             
1. To start entering the e-mail settings, select S t a r t .  
E - m a i l m e s s a g e s  
2. In M a i l b o x t y p e , select I M A P 4 or P O P 3 , and select  
N e x t .  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > M a i l b o x .  
T i p : POP3 is a version of the post office  
protocol that is used to store and retrieve e-  
mail or internet mail messages from a server.  
IMAP4 is a version of the internet message  
access protocol that lets you access and  
manage e-mail messages while the  
messages are still on the e-mail server. You  
can then choose which messages to  
download to your device.  
To receive and send e-mail, you must have a remote  
mailbox service. This service may be offered by an  
internet service provider, a network service provider,  
or your company. Your device is compliant with  
internet standards SMTP, IMAP4 (revision 1), and POP3,  
and with different vendor-specific e-mail solutions.  
Other e-mail providers mayoffer services withdifferent  
settings or features than those described in this user  
guide. Contact your e-mail provider or service provider  
for more details.  
3. In M y e - m a i l a d d r e s s , enter your e-mail address.  
Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and  
forward e-mail on your device, you must also do the  
following:  
Select N e x t .  
4. In I n c o m i n g m a i l s e r v e r , enter the name of the  
remote server that receives your e-mail, and select  
N e x t .  
Configure an internet access point. See "Internet  
access points," p. 97.  
5. In O u t g o i n g m a i l s e r v e r , enter the name of the  
remote server that sends your e-mail, and select  
N e x t . Depending on your mobile operator, you  
might have to use your mobile operator's outgoing  
mail server instead of your e-mail provider's.  
Set up an e-mail account, and define the e-mail  
settings correctly. To do this, use the mailbox guide,  
or define the account manually. See "E-mail account  
settings," p. 62.  
Contact your service provider for the correct settings.  
6. In A c c e s s p o i n t , select the internet access point  
your device should use when it retrieves the e-mail.  
If youselectA l w a y s a s k , eachtime the devicestarts  
to retrieve e-mail, it asks which internet access  
point it should use. Select N e x t .  
m a i l b o x g u i d e  
If youselectM e n u > M e s s a g i n g > M a i l b o x , and have  
not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to  
do so. To start setting up the e-mail account with the  
mailbox guide, select Y e s .  
7. Enter a name for your new mailbox, and select  
F i n i s h .  
When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to  
the mailbox replaces M a i l b o x in the Messaging main  
view. You can have up to six mailboxes.  
5 2  
     
If you have defined several mailboxes, select one of  
them as your default mailbox. That mailbox is used  
every time you start composing a new e-mail message.  
To define the default mailbox, select O p t i o n s >  
S e t t i n g s > E - m a i l > D e f a u l t m a i l b o x and the  
mailbox.  
R e a d a n d r e p l y t o e - m a i l  
I m p o r t a n t : Exercise caution when opening  
messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious  
software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC.  
To read a received e-mail, open it from the mailbox.  
To open an attachment, select O p t i o n s >  
A t t a c h m e n t s . Scroll to the attachment, and press the  
scroll key.  
C o n n e c t t o a r e m o t e m a i l b o x  
E-mail addressed to you is not automatically received  
by your device, but by your remote mailbox. To read  
your e-mail, you must first connect to the remote  
mailbox; then select the e-mail messages you wish to  
retrieve into your device.  
To reply only to the sender of an e-mail, select  
O p t i o n s > R e p l y > T o s e n d e r .  
To reply to all recipients of an e-mail, select O p t i o n s >  
1. To retrieve received e-mail messages to your device  
and view them, select your mailbox in the  
Messaging main view. When the device asks  
C o n n e c t t o m a i l b o x ? , select Y e s .  
R e p l y > T o a l l .  
T i p : If you reply to an e-mail that contains  
attached files, the attachments are not included  
in the reply. If you forward the received e-mail,  
the attachments are included.  
2. Enter your user name and password, if prompted.  
3. Select O p t i o n s > R e t r i e v e e - m a i l > N e w to  
retrieve new messages that you have neither read  
nor retrieved, S e l e c t e d to retrieve only messages  
you select from the remote mailbox, or A l l to  
retrieve all messages not previously retrieved.  
To forward an e-mail, select O p t i o n s > F o r w a r d .  
To attach a file to an e-mail message, select O p t i o n s >  
I n s e r t and the attachment you want to add.  
To delete an attachment from an e-mail that you are  
sending, select the attachment and O p t i o n s >  
R e m o v e .  
4. To manage your e-mail offline to save in connection  
costs and work in conditions that do not allow a  
data connection, select O p t i o n s > D i s c o n n e c t to  
disconnect from the remote mailbox. Any changes  
you make in the remote mailbox folders while  
To set the message priority, select O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g  
o p t i o n s > P r i o r i t y .  
offline, take effect in your remote mailbox the next To set the sending time for the e-mail message, select  
time you go online and synchronise.  
O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s > S e n d m e s s a g e .  
Select I m m e d i a t e l y , or select W h e n c o n n . a v a i l . if  
you are working offline.  
5 3  
       
To call the sender of the e-mail message, if the sender To cancel the deleting, select O p t i o n s > R e s t o r e .  
can be found in Contacts, select O p t i o n s > C a l l .  
To reply to the sender of the e-mail with an audio  
S u b f o l d e r s i n y o u r r e m o t e e -  
message or multimedia message, select O p t i o n s >  
C r e a t e m e s s a g e .  
m a i l  
If you create subfolders in your IMAP4 mailboxes on a  
remote server, you can view and manage these folders  
with your device when you subscribe to them. You can  
only subscribe to folders in your IMAP4 mailboxes.  
To view folders in your IMAP4 mailbox, establish a  
connection, and select O p t i o n s > E - m a i l s e t t i n g s >  
R e t r i e v a l s e t t i n g s > F o l d e r s u b s c r i p t i o n s .  
W r i t e a n d s e n d e - m a i l  
1. To write an e-mail, select N e w m e s s a g e > E -  
m a i l .  
2. Select O p t i o n s > A d d r e c i p i e n t to select the  
recipients' e-mail addresses from Contacts, or enter  
thee-mail addresses in the T o field. Use a semicolon  
to separate entries. Use the C c field to send a copy  
to other recipients, or the B c c field to send a blind  
copy to recipients.  
To view a remote folder, select a folder and O p t i o n s >  
S u b s c r i b e . Every time you go online, the subscribed  
folders are updated. This may take some time if the  
folders are large.  
3. In the S u b j e c t field, enter the subject of the e-mail.  
To update the list of folders, select a folder and  
4. Enter your e-mail message in the text area, and  
O p t i o n s > U p d a t e f o l d e r l i s t .  
select O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
D e l e t e m e s s a g e s  
To free up memory space on your device, regularly  
delete messages from the Inbox and Sent folders, and  
delete retrieved e-mail messages.  
To delete e-mail from the device only, and keep the  
original on the server, select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e >  
P h o n e ( h e a d e r r e m a i n s ) .  
To delete e-mail both from the device and the remote  
server, select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e > P h o n e a n d  
s e r v e r .  
T e x t m e s s a g e s  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .  
W r i t e a n d s e n d t e x t  
m e s s a g e s  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .  
Your device supports the sending of text messages  
beyond the limit for a single message. Longer  
messages are sent as two or more messages. Your  
5 4  
                 
service provider may charge accordingly. Characters  
To convert the message to another format, select  
with accents or other marks, and characters from some O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s > M e s s a g e s e n t a s >  
language options, take up more space, and limit the  
number of characters that can be sent in a single  
message.  
T e x t , F a x , P a g i n g , or E - m a i l . Change this option only  
if you are sure that your message centre is able to  
convert text messages into these other formats.  
Contact your service provider.  
1. To write a text message, select N e w m e s s a g e >  
T e x t m e s s a g e .  
2. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number, or press  
the scroll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you  
enter more than one number, separate the  
numbers with a semicolon.  
T e x t m e s s a g e s o n t h e S I M  
c a r d  
Select O p t i o n s > S I M m e s s a g e s .  
3. Enter the text of the message. To use a template,  
Text messages may be stored on your SIM card. Before  
you can view SIM messages, you must copy the  
messages to a folder in the device. After copying the  
messages to a folder, you can view them in the folder  
or delete them from the SIM card.  
select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t > T e m p l a t e .  
4. Select O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
S e n d i n g o p t i o n s f o r t e x t  
m e s s a g e s  
To select a message centre to send the message, select  
O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s > M e s s a g e c e n t r e i n  
u s e .  
1. Select O p t i o n s > M a r k / U n m a r k > M a r k or M a r k  
a l l to mark every message.  
2. Select O p t i o n s > C o p y .  
3. Select a folder and O K to begin copying.  
To view SIM card messages, open the folder where you  
To have the network send you delivery reports on your copied the messages, and open a message.  
messages (network service), select O p t i o n s >  
S e n d i n g o p t i o n s > R e c e i v e r e p o r t > Y e s .  
V i e w p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s  
To define how long the message centre resends your  
message (network service) if the first attempt fails,  
N o t e : The appearance of a picture message may  
select O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s > M e s s a g e  
v a l i d i t y . If the recipient cannot be reached within the  
validity period, the message is deleted from the  
message centre.  
vary depending on the receiving device.  
To view a picture message, open the message from the  
Inbox folder.  
5 5  
           
To view information about the picture message, select on your device, you must define the multimedia  
O p t i o n s > M e s s a g e d e t a i l s .  
message settings. Your device may have recognised  
the SIM card provider and automatically configured the  
multimedia message settings. If not, use Settings  
wizard, or contact your service provider for the correct  
settings. See "Multimedia message settings," p. 61.  
To save a message in a different folder, select  
O p t i o n s > M o v e t o f o l d e r .  
To add the sender of the message to Contacts, select  
O p t i o n s > S a v e t o C o n t a c t s .  
C r e a t e a n d s e n d m u l t i m e d i a  
m e s s a g e s  
F o r w a r d p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s  
1. To forward the message, open the message from  
the Inbox folder and select O p t i o n s > F o r w a r d .  
I m p o r t a n t : Exercise caution when opening  
messages. Messages may contain malicious software  
or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC.  
2. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number, or press  
the scroll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you  
enter more than one number, separate the  
numbers with a semicolon.  
1. To create a new message, select N e w m e s s a g e >  
M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e .  
3. Enter the text of your message. To use a template,  
2. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail  
address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient  
from Contacts. If you enter more than one number  
or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon.  
select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t > T e m p l a t e .  
4. Select O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
T i p : To remove the picture from the message,  
select O p t i o n s > R e m o v e p i c t u r e .  
3. In the S u b j e c t field, enter a subject for the  
message. To change the fields that are visible,  
select O p t i o n s > A d d r e s s f i e l d s .  
M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e s  
4. Enter the text of the message, and select O p t i o n s >  
I n s e r t o b j e c t to add media objects. You can add  
objects such as I m a g e , S o u n d c l i p , or V i d e o c l i p .  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .  
Only devices that have compatible features can receive  
and display multimedia messages. The appearance of  
a message may vary depending on the receiving device.  
The wireless network may limit the size of MMS  
messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit  
the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent  
by MMS.  
A multimedia message (MMS) can contain text and  
objects such as images, sound clips, or video clips.  
Before you can send or receive multimedia messages  
5 6  
5. Each slide of your message can contain only one  
video or sound clip. To add more slides to your  
         
message, select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t n e w > S l i d e .  
To change the order of slides in your message,  
select O p t i o n s > M o v e .  
T i p : To add recipients to your reply, select  
O p t i o n s > A d d r e c i p i e n t to select the  
recipients of the message from Contacts, or  
enter the recipients' phone numbers or e-  
mail addresses manually in the T o field.  
6. To preview a multimedia message before sending  
it, select O p t i o n s > P r e v i e w .  
7. Select O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
3. Enter the text of the message, and select O p t i o n s >  
S e n d .  
To delete an object from a multimedia message, select  
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e .  
To set the sending options for the current multimedia  
C r e a t e p r e s e n t a t i o n s  
message, select O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s .  
Creating multimedia presentations is not possible if  
the M M S c r e a t i o n m o d e setting is set to R e s t r i c t e d .  
To change the setting, select M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s >  
S e t t i n g s > M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e > M M S c r e a t i o n  
m o d e > F r e e .  
R e c e i v e a n d r e p l y t o  
m u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e s  
1. To create a presentation, select N e w m e s s a g e >  
M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e .  
I m p o r t a n t : Exercise caution when opening  
messages. Messages may contain malicious software  
or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC.  
2. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail  
address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient  
from Contacts. If you enter more than one number  
or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon.  
T i p : If you receive multimedia messages that  
contain objects unsupported by your device, you  
cannot open them. Try to send these objects to  
another device such as a computer, and open  
them there.  
3. Select O p t i o n s > C r e a t e p r e s e n t a t i o n and a  
presentation template. A template may define  
which media objects you can include in the  
presentation, where they appear, and which effects  
are displayed between images and slides.  
1. To reply to a multimedia message, open the  
message, and select O p t i o n s > R e p l y .  
4. Scroll to the text area and enter the text.  
2. Select O p t i o n s and T o s e n d e r to reply to the sender  
with a multimedia message, V i a t e x t m e s s a g e to  
reply with a text message, V i a a u d i o m e s s a g e to  
reply with an audio message, or V i a e - m a i l to reply  
with an e-mail message.  
5. To insert images, sound, video, or notes in your  
presentation, scroll to the corresponding object  
area, and select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t .  
6. To add slides, select I n s e r t > N e w s l i d e .  
5 7  
       
To select the background colour for the presentation  
and background images for different slides, select  
O p t i o n s > B a c k g r o u n d s e t t i n g s .  
V i e w a n d s a v e m u l t i m e d i a  
a t t a c h m e n t s  
To set effects between images or slides, select  
To view multimedia messages as complete  
presentations, open the message, and select  
O p t i o n s > P l a y p r e s e n t a t i o n .  
O p t i o n s > E f f e c t s e t t i n g s .  
To preview the presentation, select O p t i o n s >  
P r e v i e w . Multimedia presentations may only be  
viewed in compatible devices that support  
presentations. They may appear different in different  
devices.  
T i p : To view or play a multimedia object in a  
multimedia message, select V i e w i m a g e , P l a y  
s o u n d c l i p , or P l a y v i d e o c l i p .  
To view the name and size of an attachment, open the  
message, and select O p t i o n s > O b j e c t s .  
V i e w p r e s e n t a t i o n s  
To save a multimedia object, select O p t i o n s >  
O b j e c t s , the object, and O p t i o n s > S a v e .  
To view a presentation, open the multimedia message  
from the Inbox folder. Scroll to the presentation, and  
press the scroll key.  
F o r w a r d a m u l t i m e d i a  
m e s s a g e  
To pause the presentation, press either selection key.  
To resume playing the presentation, select O p t i o n s >  
C o n t i n u e .  
Open Inbox, scroll to a multimedia notification, and  
press the scroll key. To send the message to a  
compatible device without retrieving it to your device,  
select O p t i o n s > F o r w a r d . If the server does not  
support multimedia message forwarding, this option  
is not available.  
If the text or images are too large to fit on the display,  
select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e s c r o l l i n g , and scroll to see  
the entire presentation.  
To find phone numbers and e-mail or web addresses in  
the presentation, select O p t i o n s > F i n d . You may use  
these numbers and addresses to make calls, send  
messages, or create bookmarks, for example.  
1. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail  
address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient  
from Contacts. If you enter more than one number  
or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon.  
2. Edit the message, if desired, and select O p t i o n s >  
S e n d .  
5 8  
         
T i p : To edit the delivery settings of the message,  
support this feature. M a x i m u m t i m e is the  
select O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s .  
maximum amount of time allowed by the network.  
S e n d a s o u n d c l i p  
S p e c i a l m e s s a g e t y p e s  
1. To compose an audio message, select N e w  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .  
m e s s a g e > A u d i o m e s s a g e .  
You can receive special messages that contain data,  
such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or  
internet access or e-mail account settings.  
2. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail  
address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient  
from Contacts. If you enter more than one number  
or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon.  
To save the contents of these messages, select  
O p t i o n s > S a v e .  
3. Select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t s o u n d c l i p , and select  
whether to record a sound clip or select one from  
Gallery.  
S e r v i c e m e s s a g e s  
4. Select O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
Service messages are sent to your device by service  
providers. Service messages may contain notifications  
such as news headlines, services, or links through  
which the message content can be downloaded.  
S e n d i n g o p t i o n s f o r  
m u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e s  
Select N e w m e s s a g e > M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e >  
O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s and from the following  
options:  
To define the service message settings, select  
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > S e r v i c e m e s s a g e .  
To download the service or message content, select  
O p t i o n s > D o w n l o a d m e s s a g e .  
R e c e i v e r e p o r t — Select Y e s if you want to receive  
To view information about the sender, web address,  
expiration date, and other details of the message  
before downloading it, select O p t i o n s > M e s s a g e  
d e t a i l s .  
a notification when the message has been  
successfully delivered to the recipient. Receiving a  
delivery report of a multimedia message that has  
been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible.  
M e s s a g e v a l i d i t y — Select how long the messaging  
centre tries to send the message. If the recipient of  
a message cannot be reached within the validity  
period, the message is removed from the  
S e n d s e r v i c e c o m m a n d s  
You can send a service request message (also known  
5 9  
as a USSD command) to your service provider and  
multimedia messaging centre. The network must  
                 
request activation for certain network services. Contact To add, edit, or delete topics, select O p t i o n s >  
your service provider for the service request text.  
T o p i c .  
To send a service request message, select O p t i o n s >  
S e r v i c e c o m m a n d . Enter the service request text and  
select O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
M e s s a g i n g s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .  
Fill in all fields marked with M u s t b e d e f i n e d or with  
C e l l b r o a d c a s t  
a red asterisk.  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > C e l l  
Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and  
configure the correct text message, multimedia  
message, and GPRS settings automatically. If not,  
contact your service provider for the correct settings,  
order the settings from your service provider in a  
configuration message, or use the Settings wizard  
application.  
b r o a d c a s t .  
With the cell broadcast network service, you can  
receive messages on various topics from your service  
provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a  
particular region. For available topics and relevant  
topic numbers, contact your service provider. Cell  
broadcast messages cannot be received when the  
device is in the remote SIM mode. A packet data (GPRS)  
connection may prevent cell broadcast reception.  
T e x t m e s s a g e s e t t i n g s  
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > T e x t m e s s a g e .  
Select from the following:  
Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS  
(3G) networks.  
To receive cell broadcast messages, you may need to  
set the cell broadcast reception on. Select O p t i o n s >  
S e t t i n g s > R e c e p t i o n > O n .  
M e s s a g e c e n t r e s — View the available message  
centres for your device, or create a new one.  
M e s s a g e c e n t r e i n u s e — Select a message centre  
to send the message.  
To view messages related to a topic, select the topic.  
C h a r a c t e r e n c o d i n g — Select R e d u c e d s u p p o r t to  
use automatic character conversion to another  
encoding system when available.  
To receive messages related to a topic, select  
O p t i o n s > S u b s c r i b e .  
T i p : You can set important topics as hot topics.  
While the device is in the standby mode, you are  
notified when you receive a message related to  
a hot topic. Select a topic, and select O p t i o n s >  
H o t m a r k .  
R e c e i v e r e p o r t — Select Y e s if you want the  
network to send you delivery reports on your  
messages (network service).  
M e s s a g e v a l i d i t y — Select how long the message  
centre resends your message if the first attempt fails  
6 0  
         
(network service). If the recipient cannot be reached  
within the validity period, the message is deleted  
from the message centre.  
A c c e s s p o i n t i n u s e — Select the default access  
point to connect to the multimedia message centre.  
You may not be able to change the default access  
point if it is preset in your device by your service  
provider.  
M e s s a g e s e n t a s — Convert the message to another  
format, such as T e x t , F a x , P a g i n g , or E - m a i l .  
Change this option only if you are sure that your  
message centre is able toconverttextmessages into  
these other formats. Contact your service provider.  
P r e f e r r e d c o n n e c t i o n — Select the preferred  
method of connection when sending text messages  
from your device.  
M u l t i m e d i a r e t r i e v a l — Select A l w a y s  
a u t o m a t i c to receive multimedia messages always  
automatically, A u t o i n h o m e n e t w . to receive  
notification of a new multimedia message that you  
can retrieve from the message centre (for example,  
when you are travelling abroad and are outside your  
home network), M a n u a l to retrieve multimedia  
messages from the message centre manually, or  
O f f to prevent receipt of any multimedia messages.  
A l l o w a n o n . m s g s . — Select whether you want to  
receive messages from unknown senders.  
R e c e i v e a d v e r t s — Select whether you want to  
receive messages defined as advertisements.  
R e c e i v e r e p o r t — Select Y e s to have the status of  
the sent message to be shown in the log (network  
service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia  
message that has been sent to an e-mail address  
may not be possible.  
R e p l y v i a s a m e c e n t r e — Select whether you want  
the reply message to be sent using the same text  
message centre number (network service).  
M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e  
s e t t i n g s  
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e .  
Select from the following:  
I m a g e s i z e — Select S m a l l or L a r g e to scale images  
in multimedia messages. Select O r i g i n a l to  
maintain the original image size.  
D e n y r e p o r t s e n d i n g — Select Y e s to not send  
delivery reports from your device for received  
multimedia messages.  
M M S c r e a t i o n m o d e — Select R e s t r i c t e d to have  
your device prevent you from including content in  
multimedia messages that may not be supported by  
the network or the receiving device. To receive  
warnings about including such content, select  
G u i d e d . To create a multimedia message with no  
restrictions on attachment type, select F r e e . If you  
select R e s t r i c t e d , creating multimedia  
M e s s a g e v a l i d i t y — Select how long the messaging  
centre tries to send the message (network service).  
If the recipient of a message cannot be reached  
within the validity period, the message is removed  
from the multimedia messaging centre. M a x i m u m  
t i m e is the maximum amount of time allowed by  
the network.  
presentations is not possible.  
6 1  
   
a s k if you want to confirm from where the e-mail  
should be deleted every time you delete an e-mail.  
S e n d m e s s a g e — Select to send the e-mail  
immediately or when a connection is available.  
S e n d c o p y t o s e l f — Select whether you want to  
save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox  
and to the address defined in M y e - m a i l a d d r e s s in  
the O u t g o i n g e - m a i l settings.  
E - m a i l a c c o u n t s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >  
E - m a i l .  
If you try to edit mailbox settings but have not set up  
an e-mail account, the mailbox guide opens and helps  
you set up your e-mail account.  
If you have defined a mailbox, scroll to it, and press the  
I n c l u d e s i g n a t u r e — Select whether you want to  
attach a signature to your e-mail messages.  
N e w e - m a i l a l e r t s — Select whether you want to  
be notified of a new received e-mail message with  
a tone and a note.  
scroll key to edit the settings.  
The settings available for editing may vary. Some  
settings may be preset by your service provider.  
C o n n e c t i o n s e t t i n g s  
R e t r i e v a l s e t t i n g s  
To define the connection settings, select an e-mail  
account and O p t i o n s > E d i t > C o n n e c t i o n  
s e t t i n g s . To editthesettingsfor the e-mailyoureceive,  
select I n c o m i n g e - m a i l . To edit the settings for the e-  
mail you send, select O u t g o i n g e - m a i l .  
To define the retrieval settings, select the e-mail  
account, select O p t i o n s > E d i t > R e t r i e v a l  
s e t t i n g s , and define the following settings:  
E - m a i l t o r e t r i e v e — Select whether you want to  
retrieve only the e-mail header information such as  
sender, subject and date, e-mail, or e-mail with  
attachments. This setting is for POP3 mailboxes  
only.  
U s e r s e t t i n g s  
To define the user settings for an e-mail account, select  
the account, select O p t i o n s > E d i t > U s e r s e t t i n g s ,  
and define the following settings:  
R e t r i e v a l a m o u n t — Select the number of e-mail  
messages you want to retrieve from the remote  
server to your mailbox.  
M y n a m e — Enter a name to appear before your e-  
mail address when you send e-mail.  
I M A P 4 f o l d e r p a t h — Define the folder path for  
folders to be subscribed. This setting is for IMAP4  
mailboxes only.  
R e p l y - t o — Select whether you want replies to be  
redirected to a different address. Select O n , and  
enter the e-mail address to which you want to direct  
the replies. You can only enter one address to which  
replies are directed.  
F o l d e r s u b s c r i p t i o n s — Subscribe to other folders  
in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from  
those folders. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes  
only.  
D e l e t e e - m a i l s f r o m — Select whether you want to  
delete the e-mail messages only from the device or  
from both the device and the server. Select A l w a y s  
6 2  
             
downloads since not all services can be downloaded  
automatically.  
A u t o m a t i c r e t r i e v a l s e t t i n g s  
To define the automatic retrieval settings for an e-mail  
account, select the account, select O p t i o n s > E d i t >  
A u t o m a t i c r e t r i e v a l , and define the following  
settings:  
C e l l b r o a d c a s t s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >  
E - m a i l r e t r i e v a l — Select E n a b l e d to retrieve new  
e-mail messages automatically from your remote  
mailbox, or O n l y i n h o m e n e t w . to retrieve new e-  
mail messages automatically from your remote  
mailbox only when you are in your home network  
and not, for example, travelling.  
C e l l b r o a d c a s t .  
To receive cell broadcast messages, select  
R e c e p t i o n > O n .  
To select the languages in which you want to receive  
cell broadcast messages, select L a n g u a g e .  
R e t r i e v a l d a y s — Select the days on which e-mail  
is retrieved to your device.  
To display new topics in the cell broadcast topics list,  
select T o p i c d e t e c t i o n > O n .  
R e t r i e v a l h o u r s — Define the hours between which  
the e-mail is retrieved.  
R e t r i e v a l i n t e r v a l — Select the interval between  
retrieving new e-mail messages.  
O t h e r s e t t i n g s  
E - m a i l n o t i f i c a t i o n s — Select whether you want to  
receive notifications on received e-mail.  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >  
O t h e r .  
Select from the following:  
S a v e s e n t m e s s a g e s — Select whetherto storesent  
S e r v i c e m e s s a g e s e t t i n g s  
messages in the Sent folder.  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >  
N u m b e r o f s a v e d m s g s . — Enter the number of  
sent messages to save. When the limit is reached,  
the oldest message is deleted.  
S e r v i c e m e s s a g e .  
To receive service messages from service providers,  
select S e r v i c e m e s s a g e s > O n .  
M e m o r y i n u s e — Select where to save your  
messages. You can save messages to the memory  
card only if a memory card is inserted.  
F o l d e r v i e w — Define how you want the messages  
in Inbox to be shown.  
To select how to download services and service  
message content, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >  
S e r v i c e m e s s a g e > D o w n l o a d m e s s a g e s >  
A u t o m a t i c a l l y or M a n u a l l y . If you select  
A u t o m a t i c a l l y , you may still need to confirm some  
6 3  
               
N o k i a O f f i c e T o o l s  
Nokia Office Tools support mobile business and enable To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or  
effective communication with work teams.  
change the font colour, press and hold the shift key and  
use the scroll key to select the text. Then select  
O p t i o n s > T e x t .  
To send the note using a text message, multimedia  
message, e-mail, Bluetooth, or infrared, select  
O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
To link a note to a contact, select O p t i o n s > L i n k n o t e  
t o c a l l > A d d c o n t a c t s . You can see the note on the  
display of your device when making a call to or  
receiving a call from the contact.  
A c t i v e n o t e s  
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > A c t i v e n o t e s .  
Active notes allows you to create, edit, and view  
different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos,  
hobby notes, or shopping lists. You can insert images,  
videos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes to  
other applications, such as Contacts, and send notes to  
others.  
S e t t i n g s f o r A c t i v e n o t e s  
Select S e t t i n g s .  
C r e a t e a n d e d i t n o t e s  
To create a note, start writing.  
To save notes to your device memory, select M e m o r y  
i n u s e > P h o n e m e m o r y . To save them to a memory  
card, select M e m o r y i n u s e > M e m o r y c a r d .  
To change the layout of active notes, select C h a n g e  
v i e w > G r i d . To view the notes as a list, select C h a n g e  
v i e w > L i s t .  
To see a note in the background when making or  
receiving phone calls, select S h o w n o t e d u r i n g c a l l >  
Y e s .  
To edit a note, scroll to it, and press the scroll key.  
To insert images, sound clips, video, business cards,  
web bookmarks, and files, select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t  
o b j e c t .  
To add new items to the note, select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t  
n e w . You can record sound and video clips, and capture  
images.  
6 4  
           
T i p : If you temporarily do not want to see the  
notes during phone calls, select S h o w n o t e  
d u r i n g c a l l > N o . This way you do not have to  
remove the links between notes and contact  
cards.  
S e a r c h r e s u l t s  
To open the content, select the desired search result.  
You may then use the content, for example, to answer  
e-mail messages or edit documents.  
To conduct a new search, select O p t i o n s > N e w  
s e a r c h .  
S e a r c h  
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > I n - d e v i c e s e a r c h .  
C a l c u l a t o r  
With Search, you can search for information in your  
contacts, notes, calendar appointments, to-do notes,  
e-mail messages, multimedia messages, and text  
messages. You can also search for files by the file names  
in your device memory and memory card.  
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > C a l c u l a t o r .  
This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for  
simple calculations.  
To make a calculation, enter the first number of the  
calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract  
from the function map. Enter the second number of the  
calculation, and select = . The calculator performs  
operations in the order they are entered. The result of  
the calculation remains in the editor field and can be  
used as the first number of a new calculation.  
S e a r c h f o r i n f o r m a t i o n  
1. Select the content types you want to search in. To  
remove the selection, select it again. To include all  
content types in your search, select S e l e c t a l l .  
2. Enter your search keywords or some part of the  
The device saves the result of the last calculation in its  
keywords.  
memory. Exiting the Calculator application or  
switching off the device does not clear the memory. To  
recall the last saved result the next time you open the  
Calculator application, select O p t i o n s > L a s t r e s u l t .  
3. Select S e a r c h .  
T i p : Wildcards may help you find items. In your  
search keyword, use ? to substitute a single  
character, and * to substitute zero or more  
characters. If you use a wildcard, add * to the  
beginning and end of the search keyword.  
To save the numbers or results of a calculation, select  
O p t i o n s > M e m o r y > S a v e .  
To retrieve the results of acalculationfromthe memory  
and use them in a calculation, select O p t i o n s >  
M e m o r y > R e c a l l .  
To view the search results from your previous search,  
select O p t i o n s > P r e v i o u s r e s u l t s .  
6 5  
             
2003 documents (*.doc, *.xls, and *.ppt) with  
Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of  
Quickoffice, you can also edit files.  
F i l e m a n a g e r  
With File manager, you can manage the contents and  
properties of files and folders on your device memory  
and memory card. You can open, create, move, copy,  
rename, send, and search for files and folders.  
All file formats or features are not supported.  
W o r k w i t h f i l e s  
Copyright protection may prevent sending some files.  
To open a file, scroll to the corresponding tab, select  
Open the device tab or the memory card tab.  
the file, and press the scroll key.  
To select multiple files, scroll to each file, and select  
To create a new file, select O p t i o n s > N e w f i l e >  
O p t i o n s > M a r k / U n m a r k > M a r k .  
Q u i c k w o r d or Q u i c k s h e e t .  
To send the selected files, select O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
To sort files according to the type, select O p t i o n s >  
To move or copy files or folders to another folder, select  
O p t i o n s > M o v e t o f o l d e r or C o p y t o f o l d e r . Default  
folders such as Sound clips in Gallery cannot be moved.  
S o r t b y .  
To view the details of a file, select O p t i o n s >  
D e t a i l s . The details include the name, size and location  
of the file, and the time and date when the file was last  
modified.  
To search for files, select O p t i o n s > F i n d . Enter the  
search text, and press the scroll key. The folders and  
files whose names contain the search text are  
displayed.  
To view information about the selected file, select  
O p t i o n s > D e t a i l s . To view additional information  
about the file online, select O p t i o n s > A d d i t i o n a l  
d e t a i l s .  
To send files to a compatible device, select O p t i o n s >  
S e n d and the sending method.  
N o k i a T e a m s u i t e  
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > T e a m s .  
With Nokia Team Suite, you can create, edit, and delete  
teams, and send messages, view teams' web pages and  
communication history, and make phone calls to  
teams.  
Q u i c k o f f i c e  
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > Q u i c k o f f i c e .  
Quickoffice consists of Quickword for Microsoft Word,  
Quicksheet for Microsoft Excel, Quickpoint for Microsoft  
PowerPoint, and Quickmanager for purchasing  
6 6  
software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and  
           
P u s h t o t a l k — Communicate through push to talk  
(network service) with the team or selected team  
members.  
W o r k w i t h t e a m s  
To create a new team, select O p t i o n s > T e a m >  
C r e a t e n e w . Give a name for the team and enter the  
conference call service information, if needed. Then  
select the members for the team.  
T e a m W e b b o o k m a r k s — Open the bookmark  
folder that contains the team web pages.  
To select an action, first select the team to which you  
want to apply the action, then scroll to the action bar,  
and select the desired action. If you do not want to  
apply the action to all team members, open the team,  
and select the desired members. Then select the action.  
E d i t t e a m s  
To add team members, select O p t i o n s > M e m b e r s >  
A d d .  
To remove team members, select O p t i o n s >  
To find more actions than are shown on the action bar,  
M e m b e r s > R e m o v e .  
select O p t i o n s > A c t i o n s .  
To edit the details of a member, select O p t i o n s >  
The following actions are available:  
M e m b e r s > E d i t .  
C a l l — Make a phone call to the team or selected  
team members. The team members are called one  
by one and put on hold until the calls can be merged  
into a conference call (network service). The  
maximum number of participants depends on the  
network service.  
To see to which teams a member belongs, select  
O p t i o n s > M e m b e r s > B e l o n g s t o t e a m s .  
N o k i a T e a m S u i t e s e t t i n g s  
To select whether to see the team members' pictures  
on the display, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > V i e w  
c o n t a c t i m a g e .  
To define the plug-in settings, select O p t i o n s >  
S e t t i n g s > P l u g - i n s e t t i n g s . This setting is available  
only if there are plug-ins to configure.  
C r e a t e m e s s a g e — Send a text message, a  
multimedia message, or an e-mail to the team or  
selected team members.  
C a l l c o n f e r e n c e s e r v i c e — Start a call to the  
conference call service (network service) defined for  
the selected team.  
C o m m u n i c a t i o n l o g — View the communication  
log for the team or selected team members.  
A c t i v e n o t e s — Write and read notes related to the  
team.  
A c t i o n b a r s e t t i n g s  
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > A c t i o n b a r i c o n s .  
T e a m s e a r c h — Search for content related to the  
team or selected team members.  
To show action buttons in the action bar, select the  
6 7  
desired actions. To hide actions, remove the selection.  
               
To change the order of the action buttons, select an  
action, and O p t i o n s > M o v e u p , M o v e d o w n , M o v e  
t o t o p , or M o v e t o b o t t o m .  
S e t b a s e c u r r e n c y a n d  
e x c h a n g e r a t e  
T i p : If you select not to show all actions in the  
action bar, you can still access the actions by  
selecting O p t i o n s > A c t i o n s .  
N o t e : When you change base currency, you must  
enter new exchange rates because all previously set  
exchange rates are cleared.  
Before you can make currency conversions, you must  
choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The  
rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency  
determines the conversion rates of the other  
currencies.  
C o n v e r t e r  
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > C o n v e r t e r .  
The converter has limited accuracy, and rounding  
errors may occur.  
1. To set the rate of exchange for the unit of currency,  
scroll to the T y p e field, and select O p t i o n s >  
C u r r e n c y r a t e s .  
C o n v e r t m e a s u r e m e n t s  
2. Scroll to the currency type and enter the exchange  
rate you would like to set per single unit of  
currency.  
1. Scroll to the T y p e field, and select O p t i o n s >  
C o n v e r s i o n t y p e to open a list of measures. Select  
the measure to use, and select O K .  
3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency,  
2. Scroll to the first U n i t field, and select O p t i o n s >  
S e l e c t u n i t . Select the unit from which to convert,  
and select O K . Scroll to the next U n i t field, and  
select the unit to which to convert.  
and select O p t i o n s > S e t a s b a s e c u r r e n c y .  
4. Select D o n e > Y e s to save the changes.  
After you have inserted all the necessary exchange  
rates, you can make currency conversions.  
3. Scroll to the first A m o u n t field, and enter the value  
to convert. The other A m o u n t field changes  
automatically to show the converted value.  
Z i p m a n a g e r  
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > Z i p .  
With Zip manager, you can create new archive files to  
store compressed ZIP formatted files; add single or  
multiple compressed files or directories to an archive;  
set, clear, or change the archive password for protected  
6 8  
             
archives; and change settings, such as compression  
level, and file name encoding.  
To print to a file, select O p t i o n s > P r i n t i n g  
o p t i o n s > P r i n t t o f i l e , and determine the location  
for the file.  
To change the printing options, select O p t i o n s >  
P r i n t i n g o p t i o n s . You can select the printer you want  
to use, the number of copies and the range of pages  
you want to print.  
You can store the archive files on the device memory  
or on a memory card.  
P D F r e a d e r  
To change the page layout before printing, select  
O p t i o n s > P r i n t i n g o p t i o n s > P a g e s e t u p . You can  
change the paper size and orientation, define the  
margins, and insert a header or a footer. The maximum  
length of the header and footer is 128 characters.  
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > A d o b e R e a d e r .  
With PDF reader you can read PDF documents on the  
display of your device; search for text in the  
documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and  
page views; and send PDF files using e-mail.  
To preview a file or message before you print, select  
O p t i o n s > P r i n t i n g o p t i o n s > P r e v i e w .  
P r i n t i n g  
P r i n t i n g o p t i o n s  
Youcan print a message or file from the device, preview  
a print job, define page layout options, select a printer, Open a file or message, and select O p t i o n s > P r i n t i n g  
or print to a file. You may not be able to print all  
messages, such as multimedia messages or other  
special messages.  
o p t i o n s .  
Define the following options:  
P r i n t e r — Select an available printer from the list.  
P r i n t — Select A l l p a g e s , E v e n p a g e s , or O d d  
p a g e s as the print range.  
P r i n t f i l e s  
P r i n t r a n g e — Select A l l p a g e s i n r a n g e , C u r r e n t  
p a g e , or D e f i n e d p a g e s as the page range.  
N u m b e r o f c o p i e s — Select the number of copies  
to print.  
To configure a printer for your device, select M e n u >  
O f f i c e > P r i n t e r s > O p t i o n s > A d d . To set the  
printer as the default printer, select O p t i o n s > S e t a s  
d e f a u l t .  
P r i n t t o f i l e — Select to print to a file and determine  
the location for the file.  
Before you print, make sure your device is properly  
connected to the printer.  
To print a message or a file, select O p t i o n s > P r i n t .  
6 9  
           
switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone.  
If you select S t o p , the device asks whether you want  
to activate the device for calls. Select N o to switch off  
the device or Y e s to make and receive calls. Do not  
select Y e s when wireless phone use may cause  
interference or danger.  
P r i n t e r s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > P r i n t e r s .  
To add a new printer, select O p t i o n s > A d d .  
Define the following:  
P r i n t e r — Enter a name for the printer.  
D r i v e r — Select a driver for the printer.  
B e a r e r — Select a bearer for the printer.  
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select the access point.  
P o r t — Select the port.  
To change the alarm time, select O p t i o n s > R e s e t  
a l a r m .  
To remove the alarm, select O p t i o n s > R e m o v e  
a l a r m .  
H o s t — Define the host.  
U s e r — Enter the user.  
W o r l d c l o c k  
Q u e u e — Enter the print queue.  
O r i e n t a t i o n — Select the orientation.  
P a p e r s i z e — Select the paper size.  
Open the world clock tab to check the time in different  
cities.  
To add a city to the world clock view, select O p t i o n s >  
A d d c i t y .  
C l o c k  
To change the city that determines the time and date  
in your device, select O p t i o n s > S e t a s c u r r e n t c i t y .  
The city is displayed in the Clock main view, and the  
time in your device is changed according to the city  
selected. Check that the time is correct and matches  
your time zone.  
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > C l o c k .  
In Clock, you can view your local time and time zone  
information, set and edit alarms, or modify date and  
time settings.  
A l a r m c l o c k  
C l o c k s e t t i n g s  
Open the alarm clock tab.  
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .  
To set an alarm, select O p t i o n s > S e t a l a r m . When an  
To change the time or date, select T i m e or D a t e .  
alarm is active,  
is displayed.  
To change the clock shown in the standby modes,  
To switch off the alarm, select S t o p , or to stop the  
alarm for 5 minutes, select S n o o z e . If the alarm time  
is reached while the device is switched off, the device  
select C l o c k t y p e > A n a l o g u e or D i g i t a l .  
7 0  
                 
To allow the mobile phone network to update the time,  
date, and time zone information to your device  
(network service), select N e t w o r k o p e r a t o r t i m e >  
A u t o - u p d a t e .  
To change the alarm tone, select C l o c k a l a r m t o n e .  
N o t e s  
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > N o t e s .  
You can create and send notes to other compatible  
devices, and save received plain text files (.txt format)  
to Notes.  
W r i t e a n d s e n d n o t e s  
To write a note, start entering the text. The note editor  
opens automatically.  
To open a note, scroll to it, and press the scroll key.  
To send a note to other compatible devices, select  
O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings  
for a note, select O p t i o n s > S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n . Select  
S t a r t to initialise synchronisation or S e t t i n g s to define  
the synchronisation settings for the note.  
7 1  
     
F r e e t i m e  
Your device contains a variety of media applications for To adjust the image, select O p t i o n s > A d j u s t >  
both business and leisure time usage.  
W h i t e b a l a n c e or C o l o u r t o n e .  
To capture images in a sequence, select O p t i o n s >  
S e q u e n c e m o d e . The camera captures six images in a  
row.  
C a m e r a  
To capture timed images, select O p t i o n s > S e l f -  
t i m e r , select the desired time-out, and press  
A c t i v a t e . The camera captures an imageafter the time-  
out has passed.  
Select M e n u > M e d i a > C a m e r a .  
C a p t u r e a n i m a g e  
Your device supports an image capture resolution of up  
to 1600x1200 pixels. The image resolution in this guide  
may appear different.  
T i p : To access thevarious camera modes quickly,  
select O p t i o n s > S h o w t o o l b a r .  
To view the captured images, select M e n u > M e d i a >  
To capture an image, use the display as a viewfinder,  
aim at your subject, and press the scroll key. The device  
saves the image in the default folder, or in the folder  
you have defined.  
G a l l e r y > I m a g e s .  
R e c o r d a v i d e o c l i p  
T i p : To zoom in or out before taking a picture,  
1. Scroll to the video tab to activate the video  
scroll up or down.  
recorder.  
2. To start recording a video clip, press the scroll key.  
The remaining recording time is shown on the top  
of the display.  
If you do not want to keep the captured image, select  
O p t i o n s > D e l e t e . Select B a c k to return to the  
viewfinder to capture another image. Select O p t i o n s >  
G o t o G a l l e r y to view the image in Gallery.  
3. To pause the recording, select P a u s e ; to resume the  
recording, select C o n t i n u e .  
If the light is dim, select O p t i o n s > N i g h t m o d e  
7 2  
before capturing an image.  
           
4. To stop the recording, select S t o p . The device saves  
the clip in the default folder, or in the folder you  
have defined.  
W o r k w i t h m e d i a f i l e s a n d  
f o l d e r s  
5. If you do not want to keep the saved video clip,  
select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e . Select B a c k to return to  
the viewfinder to record another video clip. Select  
O p t i o n s > P l a y to view the video clip in the  
RealPlayer application.  
To open a file or a folder, scroll to it, and press the scroll  
key.  
To create a new folder, select a file and then select  
O p t i o n s > O r g a n i s e > N e w f o l d e r . You cannot  
create folders within folders.  
To copy or move files, select a file and O p t i o n s >  
O r g a n i s e > M o v e t o f o l d e r , N e w f o l d e r , M o v e t o  
m e m o r y c a r d , C o p y t o m e m o r y c a r d , C o p y t o p h o n e  
m e m . , or M o v e t o p h o n e m e m . .  
To download files into Gallery using the browser, select  
D o w n l . g r a p h i c s , D o w n l d . v i d e o s , D o w n l d . t r a c k s ,  
or D o w n l d . s o u n d s . The browser opens, and you can  
choose a bookmark or enter the address for the  
download site.  
C a m e r a s e t t i n g s  
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .  
To adjust image quality, to select whether images  
remain on the display after capturing them, and to  
change resolution, default name, or memory in which  
to save your new images, select I m a g e .  
To change the length, resolution, and default name of  
the videos you record or the memory in which to save  
them, select V i d e o .  
To search for a file, select O p t i o n s > F i n d . Write the  
item you are searching for. Files that match the search  
are shown.  
G a l l e r y  
V i e w i m a g e s  
Select M e n u > M e d i a > G a l l e r y .  
To open an image for viewing, select O p t i o n s >  
Use Gallery to access and use different types of media,  
including images, videos, music, and sounds. All  
viewed images and videos, and all received music and  
sounds are automatically saved to Gallery. Sound clips  
are opened in the Music player, and video clips and  
streaming links in the RealPlayer application. Images  
are opened in the image viewer.  
O p e n .  
To open the next or previous image for viewing, scroll  
right or left.  
To enlarge the image on the display, select O p t i o n s >  
Z o o m i n . To reduce the image on the display, select  
Z o o m o u t .  
7 3  
             
To view the image in full screen size, select O p t i o n s > does not necessarily support all variations of a media  
F u l l s c r e e n . To return to normalview, selectO p t i o n s > file format.  
N o r m a l s c r e e n .  
To rotate the image, select O p t i o n s > R o t a t e . Select  
P l a y v i d e o c l i p s a n d s t r e a m  
R i g h t to rotate the image clockwise by 90 degrees, or  
select L e f t to rotate the image counterclockwise by 90  
l i n k s  
degrees.  
W a r n i n g : Do not hold the device near your ear  
when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume  
M a n a g e i m a g e f i l e s  
may be extremely loud.  
To view detailed information about the image, select  
To play a video clip or audio file, select O p t i o n s >  
O p e n > M o s t r e c e n t c l i p s to play one of the six clips  
you most recently played, or S a v e d c l i p to play a clip  
or open a web link. Select P l a y .  
O p t i o n s > V i e w d e t a i l s .  
To send the image, select O p t i o n s > S e n d , and the  
method for sending.  
To rename the image, select O p t i o n s > R e n a m e .  
To play streaming media, select a web link that points  
to a clip, and select P l a y ; or connect to the web, browse  
to a video clip or audio file, and select P l a y . RealPlayer  
recognises two kinds of links: an rtsp:// URL and an  
http:// URL that points to a RAM file. Before the content  
begins streaming, your device must connect to a web  
site and buffer the content. If a network connection  
problem causes a playback error, RealPlayer attempts  
automatically to reconnect to the internet access point.  
To set the image as the display background, select  
O p t i o n s > U s e i m a g e > S e t a s w a l l p a p e r .  
To add the image to a contact, select O p t i o n s > A d d  
t o c o n t a c t . The Contacts application opens, and you  
can select the contact for the image.  
R e a l P l a y e r  
To adjust the volume during playback, use the volume  
keys.  
Select M e n u > M e d i a > R e a l P l a y e r .  
To fast-forward during playback, scroll up and hold. To  
rewind during play, scroll down and hold.  
To stop the playback or streaming, select S t o p .  
Buffering or connecting to the streaming site stops, the  
playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the  
beginning.  
RealPlayer plays video clips and audio files that are  
stored in the device memory or on a memory card,  
transferred to your device from an e-mail message or  
a compatible computer, or streamed to your device  
over the web. Supported formats include MPEG-4, MP4  
(not streaming), 3GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. RealPlayer  
7 4  
         
To download video clips from the web, select  
R e a l P l a y e r s e t t i n g s  
O p t i o n s > D o w n l o a d v i d e o s .  
You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from  
To view the video clip in full-screen size, select  
O p t i o n s > P l a y i n f u l l s c r e e n . Full screen increases  
the size of the video to cover the maximum video area  
possible while the aspect ratio is maintained.  
your service provider.  
To define the settings manually, select O p t i o n s >  
S e t t i n g s > V i d e o or S t r e a m i n g .  
T i p : To switch between the normal screen and  
full screen quickly, press 2 on the keypad.  
M u s i c p l a y e r  
Select M e n u > M e d i a > M u s i c p l a y e r .  
S e n d a u d i o f i l e s a n d v i d e o  
c l i p s  
With Music player, you can play music files, and create  
and listen to track lists. Music player supports files with  
extensions such as MP3 and AAC.  
To transfer a media clip to a compatible device, select  
O p t i o n s > S e n d . Select the sending method.  
To send a media clip inside a message, create a  
multimedia message, select a clip to attach and I n s e r t  
o b j e c t > V i d e o c l i p or S o u n d c l i p .  
L i s t e n t o m u s i c  
W a r n i n g : Listen to music at a moderate level.  
Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your  
hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the  
loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be  
extremely loud.  
V i e w i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t a  
m e d i a c l i p  
To view the properties of a video clip, audio file, or web  
link, select O p t i o n s > C l i p d e t a i l s . Information may  
include for example the bit rate or the internet link of  
a streaming file.  
To set on file protection for a media clip, select  
O p t i o n s > C l i p d e t a i l s > S t a t u s > O p t i o n s >  
C h a n g e . File protection prevents others from changing  
a file.  
To select a music track, select O p t i o n s > M u s i c  
l i b r a r y . A l l t r a c k s lists all music onyour device. To view  
sorted songs, select A l b u m s , A r t i s t s , G e n r e s , or  
C o m p o s e r s .  
To play the track, select O p t i o n s > P l a y . To pause the  
playing, scroll to and press the scroll key.  
To fast-forward or rewind the track, scroll up or down  
and hold.  
7 5  
To select the previous or next track, scroll up or down.  
                 
To control the music volume, scroll right or left. To  
To play all music tracks from a subcategory, scroll to a  
mute the volume, scroll left until the volume is muted. subcategory, and select O p t i o n s > P l a y .  
To view all tracks that belong to a subcategory, scroll  
to the subcategory, and press the scroll key.  
To stop a track, scroll to  
and press the scroll key.  
To play the music tracks repeatedly, select O p t i o n s >  
L o o p . Select A l l to repeat all the tracks in the current  
folder, O n e to repeat the selected track, or O f f to set  
off the repeating.  
To add all music tracks from a specific subcategory to  
a new, saved, or the currently playing track list, select  
O p t i o n s > A d d t o t r a c k l i s t .  
To delete all tracks from a category or subcategory,  
To play music in random order, select a folder and  
select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e .  
O p t i o n s > R a n d o m p l a y .  
After you have added or removed music files in the  
device, update your music library. Select O p t i o n s >  
U p d a t e M u s i c l i b r a r y . Music player searches the  
device memory for music files and updates them to the  
music library.  
P r e s e t f r e q u e n c y s e t t i n g s  
Select O p t i o n s > E q u a l i s e r .  
To use a preset frequency setting when playing music,  
select the frequency setting you want to use, and select  
O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e .  
To view music track information, select O p t i o n s >  
V i e w d e t a i l s .  
To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select  
O p t i o n s > E d i t , select a frequency band, and scroll up  
or down to increase or decrease its value. You hear your  
frequency adjustment immediately in the playback.  
T r a c k l i s t s  
You can create a new track list and add tracks to it, or  
edit a saved track list.  
To reset the frequency bands to their original values,  
select O p t i o n s > R e s e t t o d e f a u l t s .  
To create a new track list, select O p t i o n s > M u s i c  
l i b r a r y > T r a c k l i s t s > O p t i o n s > N e w t r a c k l i s t .  
To create your own frequency setting, select O p t i o n s >  
N e w p r e s e t . Enter a name for the frequency setting.  
Scroll up or down to move between the frequency  
bands and set the frequency on each band.  
To add a track to a track list, open the track list, and  
select O p t i o n s > A d d t r a c k s .  
M u s i c c a t e g o r i e s  
R e c o r d e r  
To view music categories, select M u s i c l i b r a r y >  
7 6  
A r t i s t s , A l b u m s , G e n r e s , or C o m p o s e r s .  
Select M e n u > M e d i a > R e c o r d e r .  
             
With Recorder, you can record up to 60 minutes of a  
voice memo, save the voice recording as a sound clip,  
and play the sound clip. Recorder supports the AMR file  
format.  
To change the default location of saved recordings,  
select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > M e m o r y i n u s e .  
To define the recording quality, select O p t i o n s >  
R e c o r d i n g q u a l i t y .  
You can also press the voice key to open the Recorder  
application. If you have logged in to push to talk, the  
voice key works as a push-to-talk key and does not  
open Recorder.  
T i p : Waveform files (.wav) are a more common  
audio file format, but adaptive multirate files  
(.amr) are smaller for comparable sound quality.  
R e c o r d a s o u n d c l i p  
I n s t a n t m e s s a g i n g  
To record a sound clip, select O p t i o n s > R e c o r d  
s o u n d c l i p . Select P a u s e to pause the recording, and  
R e c o r d to resume recording. When you finish  
recording, select S t o p . The sound clip is automatically  
saved to the Sound clips folder in Gallery.  
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > I M .  
Instant messaging (IM) (network service) allows you to  
converse with other people using instant messages  
and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific  
topics. Various service providers maintain IM servers  
that you can log in to after you register to an IM service.  
Service providers may differ in their support of  
features.  
P l a y a r e c o r d i n g  
To listen to the sound clip that you just recorded, select  
P l a y . The progress bar displays the playing time,  
position, and length of the clip. Select S t o p to cancel  
the playback.  
If IM is not available from your service provider, it may  
not appear in the menu of your device. Contact your  
service provider for more information about signing up  
for IM services and costs of services. For more  
information on IM settings, contact your service  
provider.  
To pause the playback of a recorded clip, select  
P a u s e . Playback resumes when you select P l a y .  
You may receive the settings in a special text message  
from the service provider that offers the IM service. If  
not, enter the settings manually.  
R e c o r d e r s e t t i n g s  
Recordings are automatically saved to the device  
memory unless you change the default location.  
Recordings that you create or receive after you change  
the settings are affected.  
7 7  
             
You can search by U s e r ' s n a m e , U s e r I D , P h o n e  
D e f i n e I M s e t t i n g s  
To define the IM application settings, select O p t i o n s >  
S e t t i n g s > I M s e t t i n g s . You can, for example, set your  
screen name and IM alert tones.  
n u m b e r , and E - m a i l a d d r e s s .  
To view a conversation, select a participant.  
To continue the conversation, enter your message, and  
select O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
To converse with an IM user or users, and to view and  
edit your IM contacts, you must log into an instant  
messaging server. To add an IM server, select  
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > S e r v e r s e t t i n g s > S e r v e r s .  
Ask your service provider for the correct settings. To set  
the server as the one to which your device  
To return to the conversations list without closing the  
conversation, select B a c k . To close the conversation,  
select O p t i o n s > E n d c o n v e r s a t i o n .  
To start a new conversation, select O p t i o n s > N e w  
c o n v e r s a t i o n . You can start a new conversation with  
a contact while you are inside an active conversation.  
However, you cannot have two active conversations  
with the same contact.  
automatically logs in, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >  
S e r v e r s e t t i n g s > D e f a u l t s e r v e r .  
To define how your device connects to the IM server,  
select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > S e r v e r s e t t i n g s > I M  
l o g i n t y p e . To establish a connection between your  
device and the default server automatically, select  
A u t o m a t i c . To automate the connection only when in  
your home network, select A u t o i n h o m e n e t w . To  
connect to the server when you open the IM  
To insert an image to an instant message, select  
O p t i o n s > S e n d i m a g e , and select the image you  
want to send.  
To save a conversation participant to your IM contacts,  
select O p t i o n s > A d d t o I M c o n t a c t s .  
application, select O n a p p . s t a r t - u p . To connect to the  
server manually, select M a n u a l and log into the server  
in the IM main view by selecting O p t i o n s > L o g i n .  
Enter your user ID and password at the prompt. You can  
obtain the user name, password, and other settings to  
log in from your service provider when you register for  
the service.  
To save a conversation, while in the conversation view,  
select O p t i o n s > R e c o r d c h a t . The conversation is  
saved as a text file that can be opened and viewed in  
the Notes application.  
I M g r o u p s  
Open I M g r o u p s . I M g r o u p s is available only if you are  
logged into an IM server, and the server supports IM  
groups.  
S t a r t a c o n v e r s a t i o n  
Open C o n v e r s a t i o n s .  
To create an IM group, select O p t i o n s > C r e a t e n e w  
To search for IM users and user IDs, select I M  
g r o u p .  
7 8  
c o n t a c t s > O p t i o n s > N e w I M c o n t a c t > S e a r c h .  
           
To join an IM group or to continue a group  
B l o c k u s e r s  
conversation, scroll to the group, and press the scroll  
Select I M c o n t a c t s > O p t i o n s > B l o c k i n g o p t i o n s >  
key. Enter a message, and select O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
V i e w b l o c k e d l i s t .  
To join an IM group that is not on the list, but for which  
you know the group ID, select O p t i o n s > J o i n n e w  
g r o u p .  
To find a blocked IM user, enter the first letters of the  
user's name. Matching names appear in a list.  
To allow receiving messages from a blocked IM user,  
To leave the IM group, select O p t i o n s > L e a v e I M  
select O p t i o n s > U n b l o c k .  
g r o u p .  
To prevent receiving messages from other IM users,  
select O p t i o n s > B l o c k n e w c o n t a c t s . Select the IM  
user from your IM contacts, or enter the user ID.  
To search for IM groups and group IDs, select I M  
g r o u p s > O p t i o n s > S e a r c h . You can search by  
G r o u p n a m e , T o p i c , and M e m b e r s (user ID).  
To add an IM user to the group, select O p t i o n s > A d d  
m e m b e r . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter  
the contact ID.  
I M a p p l i c a t i o n s e t t i n g s  
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > I M s e t t i n g s and define  
To remove a member from the IM group, select  
the following settings:  
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e .  
U s e s c r e e n n a m e — To change the name that  
To provide members with editing rights to the group,  
select O p t i o n s > A d d e d i t o r . Select a user from your  
IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. IM users with  
editing rights can edit group settings and invite other  
users to join the group or ban them from the group.  
identifies you in IM groups, select Y e s .  
S h o w m y a v a i l a b i l i t y — Select whether you allow  
all other IM users or only your IM contacts to see  
when you are online. Select T o n o - o n e to hide your  
online status.  
To remove editing rights from a group member, select  
A l l o w m e s s a g e s f r o m — Select to receive instant  
messages from all other IM users, your IM contacts  
only, or not to receive messages at all.  
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e .  
To prevent IM users from joining the group, select  
O p t i o n s > A d d t o b a n n e d l i s t . Select a user from your  
IM contacts or enter the ID of the user.  
A l l o w i n v i t a t i o n s f r o m — Select to receive  
invitations to IM groups from all IM users, your IM  
contacts only, or not to receive invitations at all.  
M s g . s c r o l l i n g s p e e d — To decrease or increase the  
speed at which new messages are displayed, scroll  
left or right.  
To allow a banned user to join the group, select  
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e .  
7 9  
S o r t I M c o n t a c t s — Select to list your IM contacts  
alphabetically or by their online status.  
       
A v a i l a b i l i t y r e l o a d i n g — To update the online  
status of your IM contacts automatically, select  
A u t o m a t i c .  
H i g h , the playback of some flash files may appear  
uneven and slow due to their original settings. Change  
the quality setting of such files to N o r m a l or L o w for  
improved playback.  
O f f l i n e c o n t a c t s — Select if IM contacts with an  
offline status are shown in the IM contacts list.  
O w n m e s s a g e c o l o u r — Select the colour of the  
instant messages you send.  
To organise your flash files, select O p t i o n s >  
O r g a n i s e .  
R e c e i v e d m s g c o l o u r — Select the colour of the  
instant messages you receive.  
V i s u a l r a d i o  
S h o w d a t e / t i m e i n f o — Select Y e s to view the  
receiving or sending time of each message in an IM  
conversation.  
Select M e n u > M e d i a > R a d i o .  
The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the  
I M a l e r t t o n e — Select the tone that is played when  
you receive a new instant message.  
coverage of the radio station in that particular area.  
The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the  
wireless device antenna. Attach a compatible headset  
or enhancement to the device for the FM radio to  
function properly.  
F l a s h p l a y e r  
Select M e n u > M e d i a > F l a s h P l a y e r .  
With Flash player, you can view, play, and interact with  
flash files made for mobile devices.  
L i s t e n t o t h e r a d i o  
W a r n i n g : Listen to music at a moderate level.  
Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your  
hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the  
loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be  
extremely loud.  
M a n a g e f l a s h f i l e s  
To play a flash file, scroll to it, and press the scroll key.  
To send a flash file to compatible devices, select  
O p t i o n s > S e n d . Copyright protection may prevent  
the sending of some flash files.  
To search for a station, select  
or  
. To set the  
frequency manually, select O p t i o n s > M a n u a l  
To switch between flash files saved on your device  
memory or memory card, scroll to the corresponding  
tabs.  
t u n i n g .  
To view available stations based on location, select  
O p t i o n s > S t a t i o n d i r e c t o r y (network service).  
8 0  
To change the flash file quality, select O p t i o n s >  
Q u a l i t y when you are playing the flash file. If you select  
           
To save the current station to your station list, select  
S a v e d s t a t i o n s  
O p t i o n s > S a v e s t a t i o n .  
To open the list of your saved stations, select  
To select a previously saved radio station, select  
or  
O p t i o n s > S t a t i o n s .  
.
To listen to a saved station, select O p t i o n s >  
To adjust the volume, use the volume keys.  
To switch from headset use to listening to the radio  
through the loudspeaker, select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e  
l o u d s p e a k e r .  
To return to the standby mode and leave the FM radio  
playing in the background, select O p t i o n s > P l a y i n  
b a c k g r o u n d .  
S t a t i o n > L i s t e n .  
To view available visual content for a station with the  
Visual Radioservice, selectO p t i o n s > S t a t i o n > S t a r t  
v i s u a l s e r v i c e .  
To change the station details, select O p t i o n s >  
S t a t i o n > E d i t .  
V i s u a l R a d i o s e t t i n g s  
V i e w v i s u a l c o n t e n t  
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s and from the following:  
To check availability and costs, and to subscribe to the  
S t a r t - u p t o n e — Select whether a tone is played  
service, contact your service provider.  
when the application is started.  
Before you can view visual content, you must have an  
internet access point defined at M e n u > T o o l s >  
S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n > A c c e s s p o i n t s .  
A u t o - s t a r t s e r v i c e — Select Y e s to have the Visual  
Radio service start automatically when you select a  
saved station that offers the Visual Radio service.  
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select the access point used for the  
data connection. You do not need an access point to  
use the application as an ordinary FM radio.  
C u r r e n t r e g i o n — Select the region you are  
currently located in. This setting is displayed only if  
there was no network coverage when the  
application was started.  
1. To view available visual content for a tuned station,  
select O p t i o n s > S t a r t v i s u a l s e r v i c e . If the visual  
radio service ID has not been saved for the station,  
enter it, or select R e t r i e v e to search for it in the  
station directory (network service).  
2. Select the location nearest to you from the station  
directory. If your device finds a station that matches  
the tuned frequency, its visual service ID is  
displayed. To view the visual content, select O K .  
P u s h t o t a l k  
8 1  
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > P T T .  
             
Push to talk (PTT) (network service) provides direct  
voice communication connected with the push of a key. S w i t c h P T T o n .  
With PTT, you can use your device as a walkie-talkie.  
To log in to the PTT service manually, select O p t i o n s >  
When the R i n g i n g t y p e setting of your device is set to  
You can use PTT to have aconversationwithone person B e e p o n c e or S i l e n t , or there is an ongoing phone call,  
or with a group of people, or join a channel. A channel you cannot make or receive PTT calls.  
is like a chat room: you can call the channel to see if  
anyone is online. The channel call does not alert the  
other users; the users just join the channel and start  
M a k e a P T T c a l l  
speaking with each other.  
W a r n i n g : Do not hold the device near your ear  
when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume  
may be extremely loud.  
In PTT communication, one person talks while the  
other users listen through the built-in loudspeaker.  
Users take turns responding to each other. Because  
only one user can talk at a time, the maximum duration  
of a speech turn is limited. For details of the speech turn  
duration for your network, contact your service  
provider.  
To make a PTT call, select O p t i o n s > P T T c o n t a c t s ,  
select one or several contacts from the list, and press  
the voice key. Remember to hold the device in front of  
you during the call so you can see the display. The  
display informs you when it is your turn to speak. Speak  
towards the microphone, and do not cover the  
P T T s e t t i n g s  
loudspeaker with your hands. Press and hold the voice  
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s and select U s e r s e t t i n g s to key the entire time you are talking. When you have  
define your preferences for PTT, or C o n n e c t i o n  
s e t t i n g s to change the connection details. Contact  
your service provider for the correct settings.  
finished talking, release the key.  
To end the PTT call, press the end key.  
When you receive a PTT call, press the call key to answer  
T i p : You may also receive the settings in a  
the call or the end key to dismiss the call.  
message from the provider of the PTT service.  
C r e a t e d P T T c a l l s  
L o g i n t o P T T s e r v i c e  
If you have set A p p l i c a t i o n s t a r t - u p on in U s e r  
s e t t i n g s , PTT automatically logs in to the service when  
started. If not, you must log in manually.  
Select O p t i o n s > P T T l o g > C r e a t e d c a l l s , and a call.  
To make a PTT call to a contact, select O p t i o n s > T a l k  
1 t o 1 .  
8 2  
To send a request to a contact to call you, select  
O p t i o n s > S e n d c a l l b a c k r e q u e s t .  
               
To create a contact, select O p t i o n s > A d d t o  
To view the currently active users of a channel, select  
C o n t a c t s .  
O p t i o n s > A c t i v e m e m b e r s .  
To view more information about a selected user, select  
O p t i o n s > C o n t a c t d e t a i l s .  
M a n a g e P T T c o n t a c t s  
When you log in to PTT, you are automatically  
connected to the channels that were active when the  
application was last closed.  
To view, add, modify, delete, or call contacts, select  
O p t i o n s > P T T c o n t a c t s . A list of names from the  
Contacts application is displayed with information  
about their login status.  
E x i t P T T  
To exit PTT, select O p t i o n s > E x i t . Select Y e s to log  
out and close the service. Select N o if you want to keep  
the application active in the background.  
To call a selected contact, select O p t i o n s > T a l k 1 t o  
1 .  
To make a group call, select several contacts and  
O p t i o n s > M a k e P T T g r o u p c a l l .  
To send the contact a request to call you, select  
O p t i o n s > S e n d c a l l b a c k r e q u e s t .  
A b o u t G P S a n d  
s a t e l l i t e s i g n a l s  
To answer a callback request, select S h o w to open the  
callback request. To make a PTT call to the sender, press  
the voice key.  
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a worldwide  
radio navigation system that includes 24 satellites and  
their ground stations that monitor the operation of the  
satellites. To use GPS, you need a compatible GPS  
receiver. Use Bluetooth connectivity to connect to the  
GPS receiver. To start using a compatible GPS receiver  
with Bluetooth connectivity, select C o n n e c t i v i t y >  
B l u e t o o t h .  
C r e a t e a P T T c h a n n e l  
To create a channel, select O p t i o n s > N e w  
c h a n n e l > C r e a t e n e w .  
To register the channel to the PTT service, select  
O p t i o n s > R e g i s t e r .  
To join a channel, select the channel you want to talk  
A GPS terminal receives low-power radio signals from  
the satellites and measures the travel time of the  
signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can  
calculate its location to the accuracy of metres.  
to, and press the voice key.  
To invite a user to a channel, select O p t i o n s > S e n d  
i n v i t a t i o n .  
8 3  
             
The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees  
and decimal degrees format using the international  
WGS-84 coordinate system.  
Establishing a GPS connection may take from a  
couple of seconds to several minutes.  
S a t e l l i t e s t a t u s  
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the  
government of the United States, which is solely  
responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The  
accuracy of location data can be affected by  
To check how many satellites your device has found,  
and whether your device is receiving satellite signals,  
select M e n u > T o o l s > G P S d a t a > P o s i t i o n >  
O p t i o n s > S a t e l l i t e s t a t u s . If your device has found  
satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the  
satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the  
satellite signal. When your device has received enough  
data from the satellite signal to calculate the  
adjustments to GPSsatellitesmadeby the United States  
government and is subject to change with the United  
States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the  
Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be  
affected by poor satellite geometry. Availability and  
quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location,  
buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions.  
The GPS receiver should only be used outdoors to allow  
reception of GPS signals.  
coordinates of your location, the bar turns black.  
Initially your device must receive signals from at least  
four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of  
your location. When the initial calculation has been  
made, it may be possible to continue calculating the  
coordinates of your location with three satellites.  
However, the accuracy is generally better when more  
satellites are found.  
Any GPS should not be used for precise location  
measurement, and you should never rely solely on  
location data from the GPS receiver and cellular radio  
networks for positioning or navigation.  
To enable or disable different positioning methods,  
such as Bluetooth GPS, select M e n u > T o o l s >  
S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > P o s i t i o n i n g > P o s i t i o n i n g  
m e t h o d s .  
P o s i t i o n i n g s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >  
P o s i t i o n i n g .  
A b o u t s a t e l l i t e s i g n a l s  
To use a specific positioning method to detect the  
If your device cannot find the satellite signal, consider  
location of your device, select P o s i t i o n i n g m e t h o d s .  
the following:  
To select a positioning server, select P o s i t i o n i n g  
If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better  
signal.  
s e r v e r .  
If you are outdoors, move to a more open space.  
If the weather conditions are bad, the signal  
8 4  
strength may be affected.  
   
Almost all digital cartography is inaccurate and  
incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the  
cartography that you download for use in this device.  
To prevent the device from automatically downloading  
maps through the internet, for example, when you are  
outside your home cellular network, select O p t i o n s >  
S e t t i n g s > N e t w o r k > U s e n e t w o r k > O f f .  
To receive a note when your device registers to a  
network outside your home cellular network, select  
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > N e t w o r k > R o a m i n g  
w a r n i n g > O n . Contact your network service provider  
for details and roaming costs.  
N o k i a M a p s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > M a p s .  
With Maps, you can see your current location on the  
map, browse maps for different cities and countries,  
search for addresses and different points of interest,  
plan routes from one location to another, and save  
locations as landmarks and send them to compatible  
devices.  
You can also purchase extra services, such as guides  
and a turn-by-turn navigation service with voice  
guidance.  
When you use Maps for the first time, you may need to  
define an internet access point for downloading map  
information for your current location. To change the  
access point later, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >  
N e t w o r k > D e f a u l t a c c e s s p o i n t .  
To adjust the size of the cache that is used for saving  
maps or voice guidance files, select O p t i o n s >  
S e t t i n g s > N e t w o r k > M a x . m e m o r y c a r d u s e  
( % ) . This option is available only when a compatible  
memory card is inserted. When the memory is full, the  
oldest map data is deleted. The cache cannot be  
emptied.  
N o k i a M a p L o a d e r  
D o w n l o a d m a p s  
Nokia Map Loader is PC software that you can use to  
download and install maps for different countries from  
the internet to your device or a compatible memory  
card. You can also use it to download voice files for  
turn-by-turn navigation.  
When you browse the map on the display, for example,  
move to another country, a new map is downloaded  
automatically. These downloaded maps are free of  
charge, but downloading may involve the transmission  
of large amounts of data through your service  
provider's network. For more information on data  
transmission charges, contact your service provider.  
To use Nokia Map Loader, download it from  
www.nokia.com/maps, and install it to a compatible  
PC.  
You can view the amount of transferred data from the  
data counter (kB) shown on the display. The counter  
shows the amount of network traffic when you browse  
maps, create routes, or search for locations online.  
You must use Nokia Maps before using Nokia Map  
Loader. Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps history  
information to check the version of map data to be  
downloaded.  
8 5  
     
1. To download maps or voice guidance files with  
Nokia Map Loader, connect your device to the PC  
with a compatible USB data cable.  
coordinates of your location with three satellites.  
However, the accuracy is generally better when more  
satellites are found.  
2. Open Nokia Map Loader in your PC. Nokia Map  
Loader checks the version of map data to be  
downloaded.  
B r o w s e m a p s  
The map coverage varies by country.  
3. Select the maps or voice guidance files you want to  
install to your device.  
When you open the Maps application, Maps zooms in  
to the location that was saved from your last session.  
If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps  
application zooms in to the capital city of the country  
you are in based on the information the device receives  
from the cellular network. At the same time, the map  
of the location is downloaded, if it has not been  
downloaded during previous sessions.  
S a t e l l i t e i n f o r m a t i o n  
The indicator  
is shown on the display when you  
browse maps. When the device tries to establish a GPS  
connection, the circles are yellow and the icon is  
blinking. When the device receives enough data from  
the satellites to calculate the coordinates of your  
current location, the icon stops blinking and turns  
green.  
To establish a GPS connection and zoom in to your  
current location, select O p t i o n s > F i n d p l a c e > G P S  
p o s i t i o n [ 0 ] . Your current location is indicated on the  
map with  
.
To check how many satellites your device found and  
whether your device is receiving satellite signals from  
the satellites, select O p t i o n s > M a p o p t i o n s >  
S a t e l l i t e i n f o .  
To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right.  
To zoom in or out, press * or # .  
To switch between the 2-D and 3-D views, select  
If your device found satellites, a bar is shown for each  
satellite in the satellite information view. The longer  
the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your  
device has received enough data from the satellite  
signal to calculate the coordinates of your location, the  
bar turns black.  
O p t i o n s > M a p o p t i o n s > 2 D / 3 D .  
To find a location, select O p t i o n s > F i n d p l a c e .  
To use a location on the map, for example, as a starting  
point for a nearby search, to plan a route, view its  
details, or start navigation (extra service), press the  
scroll key, and select the desired option.  
Initially your device must receive signals from at least  
four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of  
your location. When the initial calculation has been  
made, it may be possible to continue calculating the  
To define what kinds of points of interest are shown  
on the map, select O p t i o n s > M a p o p t i o n s >  
C a t e g o r i e s .  
8 6  
   
To take a screen shot of your location, select S a v e >  
P l a n a r o u t e  
A s i m a g e . The screen shot is saved in Gallery.  
1. Scroll to a point on the map, press the scroll key,  
To save a location as a landmark, press the scroll key  
and select R o u t e f r o m .  
and select S a v e > A s l a n d m a r k .  
2. Scroll to S e l e c t , and select O p t i o n s > S e l e c t . To  
adjust the routing settings, such as the mode of  
transportation, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >  
R o u t i n g .  
To view saved landmarks, select O p t i o n s > F i n d  
p l a c e > L a n d m a r k s .  
To send a landmark to a compatible device, press the  
scroll key, and select S e n d . If you send the landmark in  
a text message, the information is converted to plain  
text.  
3. To select the destination, scroll to T o , and select  
O p t i o n s > S e l e c t .  
4. To view the route itinerary, select O p t i o n s > S h o w  
r o u t e . The route is calculated using the selected  
routing settings.  
To adjust the network, routing, and general settings,  
select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .  
To view the itinerary route on the map, select  
O p t i o n s > S h o w o n m a p .  
F i n d a p l a c e  
To view points of interest near your current location or  
other locations on the map, select O p t i o n s > F i n d  
p l a c e > N e a r b y and a category.  
To run a simulation of the route, select O p t i o n s >  
S t a r t s i m u l a t i o n .  
To search for a point of interest by name, select  
O p t i o n s > F i n d p l a c e > K e y w o r d s e a r c h , or start  
entering the first letters of the name, and select F i n d .  
N a v i g a t i o n  
To purchase a navigation service with voice guidance  
to use in Maps, select O p t i o n s > E x t r a s e r v i c e s >  
A d d n a v i g a t i o n .  
To search for a location by address, select O p t i o n s >  
F i n d p l a c e > B y a d d r e s s . You must enter the city and  
country. To use an address you have saved to a contact  
card in Contacts, select O p t i o n s > F i n d p l a c e > B y  
a d d r e s s > O p t i o n s > S e l e c t f r o m c o n t a c t s .  
The licence you purchase is device-specific and cannot  
be transferred from your device to another device.  
After purchasing the navigation upgrade, the service is  
available through Maps.  
To view the search result on the map, press the scroll  
When you use navigation for the first time, you are  
prompted to select the language of the voice guidance  
and download the voice guidance files of the selected  
language. To change the language later, select  
key, and select S h o w o n m a p .  
To view a list of your previous locations, select  
O p t i o n s > F i n d p l a c e > R e c e n t .  
8 7  
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > V o i c e g u i d a n c e .  
     
To navigate to a destination using voice guidance,  
create a route in Maps, and select O p t i o n s > S t a r t  
n a v i g a t i o n . You can also start navigation by selecting  
any location on the map or in a results list, and  
N a v i g a t e t o .  
To browse a downloaded guide, scroll to the my guides  
tab, select a guide and a subcategory, if available.  
G P S d a t a  
To discard the created route and use another route,  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > G P S d a t a .  
select O p t i o n s > A l t e r n a t i v e r o u t e .  
With GPS data, you can view your current location, find  
To view only the next turns and hide the map, select  
your way to a desired location, and track distance.  
O p t i o n s > M a p o p t i o n s > N e x t t u r n s .  
Select N a v i g a t i o n to view navigating information to  
your trip destination, P o s i t i o n to view positioning  
information about your current location, or T r i p d i s t .  
to view your travelling information such as the  
distance and duration you have travelled, and your  
average and maximum speeds.  
To stop navigation, select O p t i o n s > S t o p  
n a v i g a t i o n .  
G u i d e s  
To purchase and download guides, select O p t i o n s >  
E x t r a s e r v i c e s > G u i d e s . The guides provide  
information about attractions, restaurants, hotels, and  
other points of interest. The guides must be  
The application must receive positioning information  
from at least three satellites to be used as a travelling  
aid.  
The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding  
errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by  
availability and quality of GPS signals.  
downloaded and purchased before use. The licence you  
purchase is device-specific and cannot be transferred  
from your device to another device.  
To download a new guide to your device, scroll to the  
nearest guides or all guides tab, select the desired  
guide, and O K . The purchase process starts  
automatically. You can pay for the guides through a  
credit card or have the amount charged to your phone  
bill, if supported by your cellular network service  
provider.  
To confirm the purchase, select O K twice. To receive a  
confirmation of the purchase through e-mail, enter  
your name and e-mail address, and select O K .  
U s e G P S d a t a  
To check the signal strength of the satellites that  
provide the positioning information necessary for  
navigation, open any of the three views and select  
O p t i o n s > S a t e l l i t e s t a t u s .  
To set a landmark or location as the destination of your  
trip, select N a v i g a t i o n > O p t i o n s > S e t  
d e s t i n a t i o n . You can also enter the destination  
latitude and longitude coordinates.  
8 8  
       
To remove the destination set for your trip, select  
your current location, U s e m a p to select the location  
from a map, or E n t e r m a n u a l l y to fill in necessary  
location information such as a name, category,  
address, latitude, longitude, and altitude.  
N a v i g a t i o n > O p t i o n s > S t o p n a v i g a t i o n .  
To save your current position as a landmark, select  
N a v i g a t i o n or P o s i t i o n , and O p t i o n s > S a v e  
p o s i t i o n .  
To show the landmark on the map, select O p t i o n s >  
S h o w o n m a p .  
To activate the trip meter, select T r i p d i s t . >  
O p t i o n s > S t a r t . To stop the trip meter, select  
O p t i o n s > S t o p .  
E d i t l a n d m a r k s  
To reset all fields and start calculating the trip again,  
To edit a landmark, select O p t i o n s > E d i t >  
select T r i p d i s t . > O p t i o n s > R e s t a r t .  
O p t i o n s and from the following:  
To change the measuring system in use, select  
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > M e a s u r e m e n t s y s t e m >  
M e t r i c or I m p e r i a l .  
S e l e c t c a t e g o r i e s — Organise the landmark to a  
group of similar landmarks. Select a category to  
modify landmark information such as a name,  
category, address, latitude, longitude, and altitude.  
R e t r i e v e c u r r e n t p o s i t i o n — Request and  
automatically fill in the geographical latitude and  
longitude coordinates to make a landmark of your  
current location.  
To enter the altitude calibration to correct the altitude  
received from the positioning satellites, select  
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > A l t i t u d e c a l i b r a t i o n .  
D e l e t e — Remove the landmark.  
L a n d m a r k s  
L a n d m a r k i c o n — Change the icon of the landmark.  
S h o w o n m a p — Show the landmark on the map.  
S e n d — Send the landmark to compatible devices.  
E d i t i n g o p t i o n s — Edit the phone numbers and URL  
addresses assigned to the landmark.  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > L a n d m a r k s .  
Landmarks are coordinates to geographic locations  
that you can save to your device for later use in  
different location-based services. You can create  
landmarks using a Bluetooth GPS accessory or network  
(network service).  
W r i t i n g l a n g u a g e — Change the writing language.  
L a n d m a r k c a t e g o r i e s  
You can see the landmark categories in two views: one  
lists categories that already contain landmarks, and  
the other lists all the categories your device has.  
C r e a t e a l a n d m a r k  
To create a landmark, select O p t i o n s > N e w  
l a n d m a r k . Select C u r r e n t p o s i t i o n to make a network  
request for the latitude and longitude coordinates of  
8 9  
             
To view the landmarks that a category contains, scroll  
to the category, and press the scroll key.  
To create a new category, select O p t i o n s > E d i t  
c a t e g o r i e s > O p t i o n s > N e w c a t e g o r y .  
To move a landmark from one category to another,  
open the landmarks tab, select the landmark, and  
O p t i o n s > A d d t o c a t e g o r y . Select the old category  
to remove the mark next to it. Select the category or  
categories to which you want to add the landmark.  
Select A c c e p t .  
R e c e i v e l a n d m a r k s  
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .  
Open a message that contains a landmark you have  
received from another device. Scroll to the landmark,  
and press the scroll key.  
To save the landmark in your device, select O p t i o n s >  
S a v e .  
To forward the landmark to compatible devices, select  
O p t i o n s > S e n d .  
To show the received landmark on the map, select  
O p t i o n s > S h o w o n m a p .  
To find out how to navigate to the received landmark,  
select O p t i o n s > S h o w r o u t e .  
9 0  
   
C o n n e c t i v i t y  
Your device offers several options to connect to the  
internet, a corporate intranet, or to another device or  
computer.  
N o k i a P C S u i t e  
You can install Nokia PC Suite from the CD-ROM or from  
the web. Nokia PC Suite can be used with Windows  
2000, Windows XP, and Windows Vista. With Nokia PC  
Suite, you can make backups, synchronise your device  
with a compatible computer, move files between your  
device and a compatible computer, or use your device  
as a modem.  
F a s t d o w n l o a d i n g  
High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA, also called  
3.5G, indicated by  
) is a network service in UMTS  
networks and provides high-speed data downloads.  
When HSDPA support in the device is activated and the  
device is connected to a UMTS network that supports  
HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e-mail,  
and browser pages through the cellular network may  
be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by  
. The icon may vary between regions.  
For more information about Nokia PC Suite, see the  
Nokia PC Suite guide.  
D a t a c a b l e  
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > U S B .  
You can activate or deactivate support for HSDPA in the  
Using a USB data cable, you can connect your device to  
a compatible computer. Install Nokia PC Suite to your  
computer before you use a cable connection, as Nokia  
PC Suite automatically installs the USB data cable driver  
to your computer. You can use the D a t a t r a n s f e r mode  
without installing the USB data cable drivers.  
device settings.  
For availability and subscription to data connection  
services, contact your service provider.  
HSDPA only affects the download speed; sending data  
to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not  
affected.  
Connect the cable to the USB connector of the device.  
To change the USB mode you normally use with the  
data cable, select U S B m o d e > P C S u i t e or D a t a  
t r a n s f e r .  
9 1  
             
To set the device to ask for the mode each time you  
connect the USB data cable to the device, select A s k o n  
c o n n e c t i o n > Y e s .  
3. Switch on infrared on the other device and wait a  
few seconds until the infrared connection is  
established.  
T r a n s f e r d a t a f r o m a c o m p u t e r  
4. Locate the desired file in an application or File  
manager, and select O p t i o n s > S e n d > V i a  
i n f r a r e d .  
1. Make sure that you have selected USB as a  
connection type in the Manage connections  
settings in Nokia PC Suite.  
If the data transfer is not started within 1 minute after  
the activation of the infrared port, the connection is  
cancelled and must be started again.  
2. Insert a memory card to your device and connect  
the device to a compatible computer with the USB  
data cable.  
All items received through infrared are placed in the  
Inbox folder in Messaging.  
3. When the device asks which mode is used, select  
D a t a t r a n s f e r . In this mode, you can see your  
Positioning the devices away from each other breaks  
device as a removable hard drive in your computer. the connection, but the infrared light beam remains  
active on your device until it deactivates.  
4. End the connection from the computer (for  
example, from an Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard  
in Windows) to avoid damaging the memory card.  
B l u e t o o t h  
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h .  
I n f r a r e d  
Do not point the infrared (IR) beam at anyone's eye or  
allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device  
is a Class 1 laser product.  
A b o u t B l u e t o o t h  
Bluetooth technology enables wireless connections  
between electronic devices within a range of 10 metres  
(33 feet). A Bluetooth connection can be used to send  
images, videos, text, business cards, calendar notes, or  
to connect wirelessly to devices that use Bluetooth  
technology.  
Use infrared to connect two devices and transfer data  
between them. With infrared, you can transfer data  
such as business cards, calendar notes, and media files  
with a compatible device.  
1. Ensure that the infrared ports of the devices face  
each other. The positioning of the devices is more  
important than the angle or distance.  
Since devices using Bluetooth technology  
communicate using radio waves, your device and the  
other devices do not need to be in direct line-of-sight.  
The two devices only need to be within a maximum of  
10 metres of each other, although the connection can  
2. Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > I n f r a r e d to switch  
9 2  
on infrared on your device.  
       
be subject to interference from obstructions such as  
walls or other electronic devices.  
2. Select B l u e t o o t h > O n .  
3. Select M y p h o n e ' s v i s i b i l i t y > S h o w n t o a l l or  
D e f i n e p e r i o d . If you select D e f i n e p e r i o d , you  
need to define the time during which your device  
is visible to others. Your device and the name you  
entered can now be seen by other users with  
devices using Bluetooth technology.  
Several Bluetooth connections can be active at a time.  
For example, if your device is connected to a headset,  
you can also transfer files to another compatible device  
at the same time.  
This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification  
2.0 supporting the following profiles: Dial-up  
Networking Profile, Object Push Profile, File Transfer  
Profile, Handsfree Profile, Headset Profile, Basic  
Imaging Profile, SIM Access Profile, Generic Object  
Exchange Profile, Generic Access Profile, Generic Audio/  
Video Distribution Profile, Advanced Audio Distribution  
Profile, and Audio/ Video Remote Control Profile. To  
ensure interoperability between other devices  
supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved  
enhancements for this model. Check with the  
manufacturers of other devices to determine their  
compatibility with this device.  
4. Open the application where the item you want to  
send is stored.  
5. Select the item, and select O p t i o n s > S e n d > V i a  
B l u e t o o t h . The device searches for other devices  
using Bluetooth technology within range and lists  
them.  
T i p : If you have sent data using Bluetooth  
before, a list of the previous search results is  
displayed. To search for more Bluetooth  
devices, select M o r e d e v i c e s .  
6. Select the device with which you want to connect.  
If the other device requires pairing before data can  
be transmitted, you are asked to enter a passcode.  
Features using Bluetooth technology increase the  
demand on battery power and reduce the battery life.  
There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth  
technology in some locations. Check with your local  
authorities or service provider.  
When the connection has been established, S e n d i n g  
d a t a is shown.  
The Sent folder in the Messaging application does not  
store messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity.  
To receive data using Bluetooth, select B l u e t o o t h >  
O n and M y p h o n e ' s v i s i b i l i t y > S h o w n t o a l l to  
receive data from a non-paired device or H i d d e n to  
receive data from a paired device only. When you  
receive data through Bluetooth, atonesounds, and you  
are asked if you want to accept the message in which  
the data is included. If you accept, the message is  
placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application.  
S e n d a n d r e c e i v e d a t a w i t h  
B l u e t o o t h  
1. When you activate Bluetooth for the first time, you  
are asked to give a name to your device. Give your  
device a unique name to make it easy to recognise  
if there are several Bluetooth devices in the vicinity.  
9 3  
   
T i p : You can access the files in the device or on  
the memory card using a compatible accessory  
that supports the File Transfer Profile Client  
service (for example, a laptop computer).  
3. Select Y e s to make the connection between your  
device and the other device automatic, or N o to  
confirm the connection manually every time a  
connection attempt is made. After pairing, the  
device is saved to the paired devices page.  
To give a nickname to the paired device, select  
O p t i o n s > A s s i g n s h o r t n a m e . The nickname is only  
displayed in your device.  
To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairing you  
want to delete and O p t i o n s > D e l e t e . To delete all  
pairings, select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e a l l . If you are  
currently connected to a device and cancel the pairing  
with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and  
the connection is ended.  
A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automatically  
after sending or receiving data. Only Nokia PC Suite and  
some enhancements such as headsets may maintain a  
connection even if not actively used.  
P a i r d e v i c e s  
Open the paired devices tab.  
Before pairing, create your own passcode (1-16 digits),  
and agree with the user of the other device to use the  
same code. Devices that do not have a user interface  
have a fixed passcode. You need the passcode only  
when you connect the devices for the first time. After  
pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection.  
Pairing and authorising the connection makes  
connecting quicker and easier, as you do not have to  
accept the connection between paired devices every  
time you establish a connection.  
To allow a paired device to connect automatically to  
your device, select S e t a s a u t h o r i s e d . Connections  
between your device and the other device can be made  
without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or  
authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own  
devices, such as your compatible headset or computer,  
or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you  
want to accept connection requests from the other  
device separately every time, select S e t a s  
The passcode for remote SIM access must have 16  
u n a u t h o r i s e d .  
digits.  
To use a Bluetooth audio enhancement such as a  
Bluetooth handsfree or headset, you need to pair your  
device with the enhancement. See the enhancement  
user guide for the passcode and further instructions.  
To connect to the audio enhancement, switch on the  
enhancement. Some audio enhancements connect  
automatically to your device. Otherwise open the  
paired devices tab, scroll to the enhancement, and  
select O p t i o n s > C o n n e c t t o a u d i o d e v i c e .  
1. Select O p t i o n s > N e w p a i r e d d e v i c e . The device  
starts to search for Bluetooth devices within range.  
If you have sent data using Bluetooth before, a list  
of the previous searchresults isdisplayed. To search  
for more Bluetooth devices, select M o r e d e v i c e s .  
2. Select the device with which you want to pair, and  
enter the passcode. The same passcode must be  
entered to the other device as well.  
9 4  
   
2. Activate Bluetooth in the car kit.  
S e c u r i t y t i p s  
3. Use your car kit to start a search for compatible  
devices. For instructions, see the user guide of your  
car kit.  
When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, select  
B l u e t o o t h > O f f or M y p h o n e ' s v i s i b i l i t y >  
H i d d e n .  
4. Select your device from the list of compatible  
Do not pair with an unknown device.  
devices.  
5. To pair the devices, enter the Bluetooth passcode  
shown on the display of the car kit to your device.  
S I M a c c e s s p r o f i l e  
T i p : If you have already accessed the SIM card  
from the car kit with the active user profile, the  
car kit searches automatically for a device with  
the SIM card. If it finds your device, and  
With the SIM access profile, you can access the SIM card  
of your device from a compatible car kit device. This  
way, you do not need a separate SIM card to access SIM  
card data and connect to the GSM network.  
automatic authorisation is activated, the car kit  
automatically connects to the GSM network  
when you switch on the car ignition.  
To use the SIM access profile, you need the following:  
Compatible car kit device that supports Bluetooth  
When you activate the remote SIM access profile, you  
can use applications on your device that do not need  
network or SIM services.  
To make connections between your device and the car  
kit without separate acceptance or authorisation,  
select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h , and open  
the paired devices tab. Scroll to the car kit, press the  
scroll key, and enter the Bluetooth passcode. When the  
device asks to make the connection automatic, select  
Y e s . If you select N o , connection requests from this car  
kit must be accepted separately every time.  
wireless technology  
Valid SIM card in your device  
When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode,  
you can only use a compatible connected  
enhancement, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls.  
Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to  
the emergency numbersprogrammed into your device,  
while in this mode. To make calls from your device, you  
must first leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has  
been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first.  
For more information about car kit devices and  
compatibility with your device, see the Nokia web site  
and your car kit user guide.  
To end the remote SIM access connection from your  
device, select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h >  
R e m o t e S I M m o d e > O f f .  
U s e t h e S I M a c c e s s p r o f i l e  
1. Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h >  
9 5  
R e m o t e S I M m o d e > O n .  
       
applicable safety requirements when establishing and  
using a WLAN connection.  
W i r e l e s s L A N  
If you move the device to another location within the  
WLAN and out of range of a WLAN access point, the  
roaming functionality can automatically connect your  
device to another access point thatbelongsto the same  
WLAN. As long as you remain within range of access  
points that belong to the same network, your device  
can stay connected to the network.  
Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use  
of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for  
more information.  
Your device can detect and connect to a wireless local  
area network (WLAN). To use WLAN, a network must be  
available in the location and your device must be  
connected to it.  
T i p : To check the unique media access control  
(MAC) address that identifies your device, for  
example to configure the MAC address of your  
device to a WLAN router, enter *#62209526# on  
the device keypad. The MAC address is shown on  
the device display.  
W L A N c o n n e c t i o n s  
I m p o r t a n t : Always enable one of the available  
encryption methods to increase the security of your  
wireless LAN connection. Using encryption reduces the  
risk of unauthorised access to your data.  
S e e W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y  
To have your device show WLAN availability, select  
M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
W i r e l e s s L A N > S h o w W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y .  
To use WLAN, you must create an internet access point  
in a WLAN. Use the access point for applications that  
need to connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is  
established when you create a data connection using  
a WLAN access point. The active WLAN connection is  
ended when you end the data connection. You can also  
end the connection manually. See "Connection  
manager," p. 100.  
If WLAN is available,  
is shown on the display.  
T i p : You can also scan for networks in range.  
You can use WLAN during a voice call or when packet  
data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN  
access point device at a time, but several applications  
can use the same internet access point.  
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > W L A N w i z . .  
The WLAN wizard helps you find and connect to a  
wireless LAN. When you open the application, your  
device starts to scan for available WLANs and lists them.  
When the device is in the Offline profile, you can still  
use WLAN, if available. Remember to comply with any  
9 6  
             
To update the list of available WLANs, select O p t i o n s > To start a search for  
R e f r e s h .  
available WLANs, scroll to  
the row showing the status,  
press the scroll key, and  
select S e a r c h f o r W L A N . To  
set WLAN scanning off, scroll  
to the row showing the  
status, press the scroll key,  
and select S w i t c h W L A N  
s c a n o f f .  
To start or continue browsing the web using the access  
point of the WLAN, scroll to the desired network, and  
select O p t i o n s > S t a r t W e b b r o w s i n g or C o n t . W e b  
b r o w s i n g .  
To disconnect the active connection to the WLAN, select  
O p t i o n s > D i s c o n n e c t W L A N .  
To view the details of the WLAN, select O p t i o n s >  
D e t a i l s .  
When S t a r t W e b b r o w s i n g  
is selected, the WLAN wizard  
To save the access point of the WLAN, select O p t i o n s >  
automatically creates an  
D e f i n e a c c e s s p o i n t .  
access point for the selected  
Always enable one of the available encryption methods  
to increase the security of your WLANconnection. Using  
encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to  
your data.  
WLAN. The access point can also be used with other  
applications requiring WLAN connection.  
If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter  
the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden  
network, you must enter the correct service set  
identifier (SSID).  
U s e t h e w i z a r d i n t h e a c t i v e s t a n d b y m o d e  
In the active standby mode, the WLAN wizard shows  
the status of your WLAN connections and network  
searches. To view the available options, scroll to the  
row showing the status, and press the scroll key.  
Depending on the status, you can start the Web  
browser using a WLAN connection, disconnect from a  
WLAN, search for WLANs, or set the network scanning  
on or off.  
If WLAN scanning is off and you are not connected to  
any WLAN, W L A N s c a n n i n g o f f is displayed in the  
active standby mode. To set scanning on and search for  
available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status,  
and press the scroll key.  
I n t e r n e t a c c e s s p o i n t s  
An internet access point is a collection of settings,  
which define how the device creates a data connection  
to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services  
or to browse web pages, you must first define access  
points for these services.  
Some or all access points may be preset for your device  
by your service provider, and you may not be able to  
create, edit, or remove them.  
9 7  
 
H o m e p a g e — Enter the web address of the page  
you want to display as the home page when you  
use this access point.  
S e t u p a n i n t e r n e t a c c e s s  
p o i n t f o r p a c k e t d a t a ( G P R S )  
4. After defining the settings, select O p t i o n s >  
A d v a n c e d s e t t i n g s to define the advanced  
settings or B a c k to save the settings and exit.  
1. Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >  
C o n n e c t i o n > A c c e s s p o i n t s .  
2. Select O p t i o n s > N e w a c c e s s p o i n t to create a  
new access point, or select an existing access point  
from the list and then O p t i o n s > D u p l i c a t e a c c e s s  
p o i n t to use the access point as a basis for the new  
one.  
A d v a n c e d i n t e r n e t a c c e s s  
p o i n t s e t t i n g s f o r p a c k e t  
d a t a ( G P R S )  
3. Define the following settings.  
C o n n e c t i o n n a m e — Enter a descriptive name  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
for the connection.  
A c c e s s p o i n t s .  
D a t a b e a r e r — Select P a c k e t d a t a .  
After setting up a basic internet access point for packet  
data (GPRS), select O p t i o n s > A d v a n c e d s e t t i n g s ,  
and define the following advanced settings:  
A c c e s s p o i n t n a m e — Enter the name for the  
access point. The name is usually provided by  
your service provider.  
U s e r n a m e — Enter your user name if required  
by the service provider. User names are often  
case-sensitive and provided by your service  
provider.  
N e t w o r k t y p e — Select I P v 4 or I P v 6 as the internet  
protocol type. The internet protocol defines how  
data is transferred to and from your device.  
P h o n e I P a d d r e s s — Enter the IP address of your  
device. Select A u t o m a t i c to have the network  
provide the device IP address. This setting is shown  
only if you select N e t w o r k t y p e > I P v 4 .  
P r o m p t p a s s w o r d — Select Y e s to enter your  
password each time you log into a server or N o  
to save the password in your device memory and  
automate the login.  
D N S a d d r e s s — Select P r i m a r y D N S a d d r e s s and  
S e c o n d a r y D N S a d d r e s s and enter their IP  
addresses, if required by your service provider.  
Otherwise, the name server addresses are provided  
automatically.  
P a s s w o r d — Enter your password if required by  
the service provider. The password is often case-  
sensitive and provided by the service provider.  
A u t h e n t i c a t i o n — Select S e c u r e to send your  
password always encrypted, or N o r m a l to send  
your password encrypted when possible.  
P r o x y s e r v e r a d d r e s s — Enter the address of the  
proxy server. Proxy servers are intermediate servers  
used by some service providers between a browsing  
service and its users. These servers may provide  
9 8  
       
additional security and speed up access to the  
service.  
W L A N s e c u r i t y m o d e — You must select the  
same security mode that is used in the WLAN  
access point. If you select WEP (wired equivalent  
privacy), 802.1x, or WPA/WPA2 (Wi-Fi protected  
access), you must also configure the relevant  
additional settings. See the device help for more  
information.  
S e t u p a n a c c e s s p o i n t f o r  
W L A N m a n u a l l y  
W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s — Edit the security  
settings for the selected security mode.  
H o m e p a g e — Enter the web addressof thepage  
you want to display as the home page when you  
use this access point.  
1. Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >  
C o n n e c t i o n > A c c e s s p o i n t s .  
2. Select O p t i o n s > N e w a c c e s s p o i n t to create a  
new access point, or select an existing access point  
from the list and then O p t i o n s > D u p l i c a t e a c c e s s  
p o i n t to use the access point as a basis for the new  
one.  
To set up a WLAN access point automatically, use the  
WLAN wizard. Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > W L A N  
w i z . .  
3. Define the following settings.  
C o n n e c t i o n n a m e — Enter a descriptive name  
for the connection.  
A d v a n c e d a c c e s s p o i n t  
s e t t i n g s f o r W L A N  
D a t a b e a r e r — Select W i r e l e s s L A N .  
W L A N n e t w o r k n a m e — To enter the service  
set identifier (SSID), that is, the name that  
identifies the specific WLAN, select E n t e r  
m a n u a l l y . To select the network from the  
WLANs in range, select S e a r c h f o r n e t w o r k s .  
N e t w o r k s t a t u s — Select H i d d e n if the network  
you are connecting to is hidden or P u b l i c if it is  
not hidden.  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
A c c e s s p o i n t s .  
After setting up a basic access point for WLAN, select  
O p t i o n s > A d v a n c e d s e t t i n g s , and define the  
following advanced settings:  
I P v 4 s e t t i n g s — Enter the device IP and name  
server addresses for the IPv4 internet protocol.  
I P v 6 s e t t i n g s — Select or enter the name server  
addresses for the IPv6 internet protocol.  
W L A N n e t w o r k m o d e — If you select  
I n f r a s t r u c t u r e , devices can communicate with  
each other and with wired LAN devices through  
a WLAN access point. If you select A d - h o c ,  
devices can send and receive data directly with  
each other, and no WLAN access point is needed.  
A d - h o c c h a n n e l — The channel is usually chosen  
automatically. To enter the channel number (1-11)  
manually, select U s e r d e f i n e d .  
9 9  
       
P r o x y s e r v e r a d d r e s s — Enter the proxy server  
If you use a cable to connect your device to a computer,  
initiate the connection from the computer.  
address.  
P r o x y p o r t n u m b e r — Enter the proxy server port  
You may not be able to use some of the other  
communication features when the device is used as a  
modem.  
number.  
M o d e m  
C o n n e c t i o n m a n a g e r  
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > M o d e m .  
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > C o n n . m g r . .  
Together with a compatible computer, you can use  
your device as a modem to connect to the web, for  
example.  
V i e w a n d e n d a c t i v e  
c o n n e c t i o n s  
B e f o r e y o u c a n u s e y o u r d e v i c e a s a m o d e m  
You need an appropriate data communications  
software on your computer, such as Nokia PC Suite.  
For more information, see the Nokia PC Suite guide.  
To see the open data connections, select A c t i v e d a t a  
c o n n e c t i o n s .  
You must subscribe to the appropriate network  
services from your service provider or internet  
service provider.  
To view detailed information about network  
connections, select a connection from the list and  
O p t i o n s > D e t a i l s . The type of information shown  
depends on the connection type.  
You must have the appropriate drivers installed on  
your computer. You must install drivers for the cable  
connection, and you may need to install or update  
Bluetooth or infrared drivers.  
To end the selected network connection, select  
O p t i o n s > D i s c o n n e c t .  
To end all active network connections simultaneously,  
To connect the device to a compatible computer using  
infrared, press the scroll key. Make sure the infrared  
ports of the device and computer are directly facing  
each other with no obstacles between them.  
To connect your device to a computer using Bluetooth  
wireless technology, initiate the connection from the  
computer. To activate Bluetooth in your device, select  
M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h and select  
B l u e t o o t h > O n .  
select O p t i o n s > D i s c o n n e c t a l l .  
S e a r c h f o r W L A N  
To search for WLANs available within range, select  
A v a i l a b l e W L A N n e t w o r k s . The available WLANs are  
listed with their network mode (infrastructure or ad-  
hoc), signal strength, and network encryption  
1 0 0  
             
indicators, and whether your device has an active  
connection with the network.  
To view the details of a network, scroll to it, and press  
the scroll key.  
To create an internet access point for a network, select  
O p t i o n s > D e f i n e a c c e s s p o i n t .  
1 0 1  
S e c u r i t y a n d d a t a m a n a g e m e n t  
Manage the data and software on your device, and take selection key, enter your lock code, and press the scroll  
care of the security of the device and its contents.  
key.  
To change the lock code, select M e n u > T o o l s >  
S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > S e c u r i t y > P h o n e a n d S I M  
c a r d > L o c k c o d e . Enter the old code and then the  
new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters  
long. Both alphabets and digits can be used, and both  
uppercase and lowercase alphabets are possible.  
I m p o r t a n t : Your device can only support one  
antivirus application. Having more than one  
application with antivirus functionality could affect  
performance and operation or cause the device to stop  
functioning.  
You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text  
message to the device. To enable remote locking and  
to define the text for the message, select M e n u >  
T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > S e c u r i t y > P h o n e  
a n d S I M c a r d > A l l o w r e m o t e l o c k > Y e s . Enter the  
remote lock message and confirm the message. The  
message must be at least 5 characters long.  
L o c k t h e d e v i c e  
I m p o r t a n t : If the device has been locked, enter  
the lock code to activate the phone function. When the  
device is locked, calls may be possible to the official  
emergency number. Making an emergency call in the  
offline profile or when the device is locked requires  
that the device recognise the number to be an official  
emergency number. It is advisable to change the  
profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code  
before you make the emergency call.  
To prevent access to the contents of your device, lock  
the device in the standby mode. Press the power key,  
select L o c k p h o n e , and enter your lock code. The  
default lock code is 12345. To unlock, press the left  
M e m o r y c a r d s e c u r i t y  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > M e m o r y .  
You can protect a memory card with a password to  
prevent unauthorised access. To set a password, select  
O p t i o n s > S e t p a s s w o r d . The password can be up to  
8 characters long and is case-sensitive. The password  
is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it  
again while you use the memory card on the same  
device. If you use the memory card on another device,  
1 0 2  
         
you are asked for the password. Not all memory cards  
support password protection.  
numbers. All phone numbers to which calls are  
allowed must start with this country prefix.  
2. Select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e f i x e d d i a l l i n g . You  
need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate  
fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts.  
Contact your service provider if you do not have the  
code. To cancel the service, select O p t i o n s >  
D e a c t i v a t e f i x e d d i a l l i n g .  
To remove the memory card password, select  
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e p a s s w o r d . When you remove the  
password, the data on the memory card is not  
protected against unauthorised use.  
To open a locked memory card, select O p t i o n s >  
U n l o c k m e m o r y c a r d . Enter the password.  
T i p : To send text messages to the SIM contacts  
while the fixed dialling service is active, you  
need to add the text message centre number to  
the fixed dialling list.  
If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked  
memory card, you may reformat the card, in which case  
the card is unlocked and password removed.  
Formatting a memory card destroys all data stored on  
the card.  
C e r t i f i c a t e m a n a g e r  
F i x e d d i a l l i n g  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >  
S e c u r i t y > C e r t i f i c a t e m a n a g e m e n t .  
Select M e n u > C o n t a c t s > O p t i o n s > S I M  
c o n t a c t s > F i x e d d i a l c o n t a c t s .  
Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of  
software but do not guarantee safety. There are three  
different types of certificates: authority certificates,  
personal certificates, and server certificates. During a  
secure connection, a server may send a server  
certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is checked  
through an authority certificate stored on your device.  
You receive notification if the identity of the server is  
not authentic or if you do not have the correct  
certificate in your device.  
With the fixed dialling service, you can restrict calls  
from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM  
cards support the fixed dialling service. Contact your  
service provider for more information.  
When fixed dialling is activated, calls may be possible  
to the official emergency number programmed into  
your device.  
1. To restrict calls from your device, select O p t i o n s >  
N e w S I M c o n t a c t and enter the contact name and  
phone number to the list of numbers to which calls  
are allowed, or select A d d f r o m C o n t a c t s to copy  
the contact from Contacts. To restrict calls by a  
country prefix, enter the country prefix in the list of  
Download a certificate from a web site, or receive a  
certificate as an e-mail attachment, or as a message  
sent through a Bluetooth or infrared connection.  
Certificates should be used when you connect to an  
online bank or a remote server to transfer confidential  
1 0 3  
     
information. They should also be used if you want to  
reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software,  
and to check the authenticity of software when you  
download and install software to your device.  
I m p o r t a n t : Even if the use of certificates makes  
the risks involved in remote connections and software  
installation considerably smaller, they must be used  
correctly in order to benefit from increased security.  
The existence of a certificate does not offer any  
protection by itself; the certificate manager must  
contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for  
increased security to be available. Certificates have a  
restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate  
not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should  
be valid, check that the current date and time in your  
device are correct.  
T i p : When you add a new certificate, check its  
authenticity.  
V i e w c e r t i f i c a t e d e t a i l s  
You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server  
when the signature and the validity period of a server  
certificate have been checked.  
To change the trust settings, select a certificate and  
O p t i o n s > T r u s t s e t t i n g s . Select an application field  
and press the scroll key to select Y e s or N o . You cannot  
change the trust settings of a personal certificate.  
To view certificate details, select V i e w d e t a i l s .  
One of the following notes may appear:  
C e r t i f i c a t e n o t t r u s t e d — You have not set any  
application to use the certificate. You may want to  
change the trust settings.  
Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that  
can use the certificate is displayed:  
E x p i r e d c e r t i f i c a t e — The period of validity has  
ended for the selected certificate.  
S y m b i a n i n s t a l l a t i o n — New Symbian operating  
system application.  
C e r t i f i c a t e n o t v a l i d y e t — The period of validity  
has not yet begun for the selected certificate.  
C e r t i f i c a t e c o r r u p t e d — The certificate cannot be  
used. Contact the certificate issuer.  
I n t e r n e t — E-mail and graphics.  
A p p . i n s t a l l a t i o n — New Java™ application.  
O n l i n e c e r t i f . c h e c k — Online certificate status  
protocol.  
C e r t i f i c a t e t r u s t s e t t i n g s  
S e c u r i t y m o d u l e s  
Trusting a certificate means that you authorise it to  
verify web pages, e-mail servers, software packages,  
and other data. Only trusted certificates can be used to  
verify services and software.  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >  
S e c u r i t y > S e c u r i t y m o d u l e .  
1 0 4  
         
V i e w a n d e d i t s e c u r i t y  
m o d u l e s  
R e m o t e c o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > D e v i c e m g r . .  
To view or edit a security module, scroll to it, and press  
With Device manager, you can manage settings, data,  
the scroll key.  
and software on your device remotely.  
To view detailed information about a security module,  
You can connect to a server, and receive configuration  
settings for your device. You may receive server profiles  
and different configuration settings from your service  
providers or company information management  
department. Configuration settings may include  
connection and other settings used by different  
applications in your device. The available options may  
vary.  
select O p t i o n s > S e c u r i t y d e t a i l s .  
To edit the PIN codes for the security module, select  
M o d u l e P I N to edit the PIN code for the security  
module or S i g n i n g P I N to edit the PIN code for digital  
signatures. You may not be able to change these codes  
for all security modules.  
The key store contains the contents of the security  
module. To delete the key store, select K e y s t o r e ,  
select the desired key store, and O p t i o n s > D e l e t e .  
You may not be able to delete the key store of all  
security modules.  
The remote configuration connection is usually started  
by the server when the device settings need to be  
updated.  
To create a new server profile, select O p t i o n s > N e w  
s e r v e r p r o f i l e .  
You may receive these settings from your service  
provider in a configuration message. If not, define the  
following:  
B a c k u p d a t a  
It is recommended to back up device memory regularly  
S e r v e r n a m e — Enter a name for the configuration  
to the memory card or a compatible computer.  
server.  
To back up information from the device memory to a  
memory card, select M e n u > T o o l s > M e m o r y >  
O p t i o n s > B a c k u p p h o n e m e m o r y .  
S e r v e r I D — Enter the unique ID to identify the  
configuration server.  
S e r v e r p a s s w o r d — Enter a password to identify  
your device to the server.  
To restore information from the memory card to the  
device memory, select M e n u > T o o l s > M e m o r y >  
O p t i o n s > R e s t o r e f r o m c a r d .  
S e s s i o n m o d e — Select the preferred connection  
type.  
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select the access point to use for  
the connection, or create a new access point. You  
You can also connect your device to a compatible  
1 0 5  
computer and use Nokia PC Suite to back up data.  
         
can also choose to be asked for the access point  
every time you start a connection.  
A p p l i c a t i o n m a n a g e r  
H o s t a d d r e s s — Enter the web address of the  
configuration server.  
P o r t — Enter the port number of the server.  
U s e r n a m e — Enter your user ID for the  
configuration server.  
Select M e n u > I n s t a l l a t i o n s > A p p . m g r . .  
You can install two types of applications and software  
P a s s w o r d — Enter your password for the  
configuration server.  
on your device:  
Applications and software specifically intended for  
your device or compatible with the Symbian  
operating system. These software installation files  
have the extension .sis or .sisx.  
A l l o w c o n f i g u r a t i o n — Select Y e s to allow the  
server to initiate a configuration session.  
A u t o - a c c e p t a l l r e q u e s t s — Select Y e s if you do not  
want the server to ask for your confirmation when  
it initiates a configuration session.  
J2ME™ applications compatible with the Symbian  
operating system. The Java application installation  
file extensions are .jad or .jar.  
N e t w o r k a u t h e n t i c a t i o n — Select whether to use  
http authentication. This setting is available only if  
you have selected internet as the bearer type.  
N e t w o r k u s e r n a m e — Enter your user ID for the  
http authentication. This setting is available only if  
you have selected internet as the bearer type.  
N e t w o r k p a s s w o r d — Enter your password for the  
http authentication. This setting is available only if  
you have selected internet as the bearer type.  
Installation files may be transferred to your device  
from a compatible computer, downloaded during  
browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as  
an e-mail attachment, or with Bluetooth.  
During the installation, the device checks the integrity  
of the package to be installed. The device shows  
information about the checks being carried out, and  
you are given options to continue or cancel the  
installation.  
To connect to the server and receive configuration  
settings for your device, select O p t i o n s > S t a r t  
c o n f i g u r a t i o n .  
If you install applications that require a network  
connection, note that the power consumption of your  
device may increase when you use these applications.  
To view the configuration log of the selected profile,  
select O p t i o n s > V i e w l o g .  
T i p : When browsing web pages, you can  
download an installation file and install it  
immediately. Note, however, that the  
connection runs in the background during the  
installation.  
1 0 6  
 
I n s t a l l a p p l i c a t i o n s  
I n s t a l l a t i o n s e t t i n g s  
To modify the installation settings, select O p t i o n s >  
S e t t i n g s and from the following:  
I m p o r t a n t : Only install and use applications  
and other software from trusted sources, such as  
applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed  
D e l e t e — The software package installation file is  
deleted from the device after the installation. If you  
download software packages using the Web  
browser, this may help reduce the amount of  
storage space required. If you want to store the  
software package file for possible reinstallation, do  
not select this option, or make sure that you have a  
copy of the software package file stored on a  
compatible computer or on a CD-ROM.  
TM  
the Java Verified testing.  
To download and install software from the web, select  
D o w n l o a d a p p l i c a t i o n s . Select the application and  
O p t i o n s > I n s t a l l .  
To view the details of an installed software package,  
select the application and O p t i o n s > V i e w d e t a i l s .  
S e l e c t l a n g u a g e : — If the software package  
contains several language versions of the software,  
select the language version that you want to install.  
T y p e — Specify what kind of applications you want  
installed. You may choose to install only  
To view the installation log, select O p t i o n s > V i e w  
l o g . A list shows what software has been installed and  
removed, and the date of the installation or removal.  
If you encounter problems with the device after  
installing a software package, use this list to find out  
which software package may be the cause of the  
problem. The information in this list may also help you  
pinpoint problems that are caused by software  
packages that are incompatible with each other.  
applications with validated certificates. This setting  
applies only to Symbian operating system  
applications (.sis or .sisx files).  
To remove software, select O p t i o n s > R e m o v e . If you  
remove software, you can only reinstall it by using the  
original software package file, or by restoring a full  
backup that contains the removed software package.  
If you remove a software package, you may no longer  
be able to open files created with that software. If  
another software package depends on the software  
package that you removed, the other software package  
may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the  
installed software package for details.  
J a v a s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s  
To specify security settings for a Java application, select  
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .  
You can define which functions the Java application can  
access. The value that you can set for each functionality  
depends on the protection domain of the software  
package.  
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select an access point that the  
application may use when making network  
connections.  
1 0 7  
       
N e t w o r k a c c e s s — Allow the application to create  
a data connection to the network.  
N o t a l l o w e d — Prevent the Java application from  
using the functionality.  
M e s s a g i n g — Allow the application to send  
messages.  
A p p l i c a t i o n a u t o - s t a r t — Allow the application to  
start automatically.  
A c t i v a t i o n k e y s  
C o n n e c t i v i t y — Allow the application to activate a  
data connection, such as a Bluetooth connection.  
M u l t i m e d i a — Allow the application to use the  
multimedia features of your device.  
R e a d u s e r d a t a — Allow the application to read  
your calendar entries, contacts, or any other  
personal data.  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > A c t v . k e y s .  
Some media files, such as images, music, or video clips,  
are protected by digital usage rights. The activation  
keys for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For  
example, with some activation keys you may listen to  
a music track only a limited number of times. During  
one playback session you may rewind, fast-forward, or  
pause the track, but once you stop it, you have used  
one of the instances allowed.  
E d i t u s e r d a t a — Allow the application to add  
personal data, such as entries to Contacts.  
P o s i t i o n i n g — Allow the application to use the  
location data in your device.  
L a n d m a r k s — Allow the application to use the  
landmarks in your device.  
U s e a c t i v a t i o n k e y s  
Digital rights management (DRM) protected content  
comes with an associated activation key that defines  
your rights to use the content.  
You can define how you are prompted to confirm the  
Java application's access to the device functions. Select  
one of the following values:  
If your device has OMA DRM protected content, to back  
up both the activation keys and the content, use the  
backup feature of ["Nokia PC Suite" or "Nokia Nseries  
PC Suite; insert the applicable one, and delete  
A s k e v e r y t i m e — Require the Java application to  
ask for your confirmation each time it uses the  
functionality.  
A s k f i r s t t i m e — Require the Java application to ask  
for initial confirmation to use the functionality.  
A l w a y s a l l o w e d — Allow the Java application to  
use the functionality without your confirmation.  
The security settings help protect your device  
against harmful Java applications that may use the  
functions of your device without your permission.  
Only select A l w a y s a l l o w e d if you know the  
supplier and trustworthiness of the application.  
brackets]. Other transfer methods may not transfer the  
activation keys which need to be restored with the  
content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA  
DRM-protected content after the device memory is  
formatted. You may also need to restore the activation  
keys in case the files on your device get corrupted.  
If your device has WMDRM protected content, both the  
1 0 8  
activation keys and the content will be lost if the device  
     
memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation O p t i o n s > D e l e t e . If there are several rights related  
keys and the content if the files on your device get  
corrupted. Losing the activation keys or the content  
may limit your ability to use the same content on your  
device again. For more information, contact your  
service provider.  
to the same media file, all the rights are deleted.  
The group key view displays all of the files related to a  
group right. If you have downloaded multiple media  
files with the same rights, they are all displayed in this  
view. You can open the groupview from eitherthevalid  
keys or invalid keys tabs. To access these files, open the  
group rights folder.  
Some activation keys may be connected to a specific  
SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed  
only if the SIM card is inserted in the device.  
To view your activation keys by type, select V a l i d  
D a t a s y n c h r o n i s a t i o n  
k e y s , I n v a l i d k e y s , or N o t i n u s e .  
To view the key details, select O p t i o n s > K e y  
d e t a i l s .  
The following details are displayed for each media file:  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S y n c .  
S t a t u s — The status is A c t i v a t i o n k e y i s v a l i d ,  
A c t i v a t i o n k e y e x p i r e d , or A c t i v a t i o n k e y n o t y e t  
v a l i d .  
With Sync, you can synchronise your contacts, calendar  
entries, notes, or mailboxes with corresponding  
applications on a compatible computer or remote  
internet server. Your synchronisation settings are  
saved in a synchronisation profile. The Sync application  
uses SyncML technology for remote synchronisation.  
For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the  
supplier of the applications with which you want to  
synchronise your device.  
C o n t e n t s e n d i n g A l l o w e d means that you can  
send the file to another device. N o t a l l o w e d means  
that you cannot send the file to another device.  
C o n t e n t i n p h o n e Y e s means that the file is in  
the device and the path of the file is displayed. N o  
means that the related file is not currently in the  
device.  
You may receive the synchronisation settings as a  
message from your service provider. The available  
applications you can synchronise may vary. Contact  
your service provider for more information.  
To activate a key, go to the Activation keys main view,  
and select I n v a l i d k e y s > O p t i o n s > G e t a c t i v a t i o n  
k e y . Establish a network connectionatthe prompt, and  
you are directed to a web site where you can purchase  
rights to the media.  
To remove file rights, open the valid keys tab or the  
keys not in use tab, scroll to the desired file, and select  
1 0 9  
 
S e r v e r v e r s i o n — Select the SyncML version you can  
use with the remote server.  
C r e a t e a s y n c h r o n i s a t i o n  
p r o f i l e  
There is a Nokia PC Suite synchronisation profile  
available in your device. You do not need to edit it if  
you synchronise your device with a computer using  
Nokia PC Suite.  
To create a new profile, select O p t i o n s > N e w s y n c  
p r o f i l e and assign a name for the profile, select the  
applications to synchronise with the profile, and  
specify the needed connection settings. Contact your  
service provider for details.  
S e r v e r I D — Enter the server ID of the remote server.  
This setting is only available if you select 1.2 as the  
SyncML version.  
D a t a b e a r e r — Select the data bearer to connect to  
the remote server during synchronisation.  
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select the access point to use for  
the synchronisation connection, or create a new  
access point. You can also choose to be asked for the  
access point every time you start synchronising.  
H o s t a d d r e s s — Enter the web address of the server  
that contains the database with which you want to  
synchronise your device.  
P o r t — Enter the port number of the remote  
database server.  
S e l e c t a p p l i c a t i o n s t o  
s y n c h r o n i s e  
U s e r n a m e — Enter your user name to identify your  
device to the server.  
P a s s w o r d — Enter your password to identify your  
device to the server.  
1. To select the applications to synchronise with a  
synchronisation profile, select O p t i o n s > E d i t  
s y n c p r o f i l e > A p p l i c a t i o n s .  
A l l o w s y n c r e q u e s t s — To allow synchronisation  
to start from the remote database server, select  
Y e s .  
2. Select the desired application, and select I n c l u d e  
i n s y n c > Y e s .  
A c c e p t a l l s y n c r e q u e s t s — To have your device ask  
for your confirmation before accepting  
synchronisation from the server, select N o .  
N e t w o r k a u t h e n t i c a t i o n — To authenticate your  
device to the network before synchronisation, select  
Y e s . Enter your network user name and network  
password.  
3. Specify the R e m o t e d a t a b a s e and  
S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n t y p e settings.  
S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n c o n n e c t i o n  
s e t t i n g s  
To define the connection settings of a new profile,  
select N e w s y n c p r o f i l e > C o n n e c t i o n s e t t i n g s and  
define the following settings:  
D o w n l o a d !  
1 1 0  
Select M e n u > D o w n l o a d ! .  
             
With Download! (network service), you can browse,  
To view the details of the selected item, select  
download, and install items, such as latest applications O p t i o n s > V i e w d e t a i l s .  
and related documents, to your device from the web.  
To return to the Download! main level, select  
The items are categorised under catalogs and folders  
provided by Nokia or independent service providers.  
Some items may be chargeable, but you can usually  
preview them free of charge.  
O p t i o n s > H o m e p a g e .  
The available options may vary depending on your  
service provider, the selected item, and the view you  
are in.  
Download! uses your network services to access the  
most updated content. For information on additional  
items available through Download!, contact your  
service provider, or the supplier or manufacturer of the  
item.  
D o w n l o a d ! s e t t i n g s  
To change the Download! settings, select O p t i o n s >  
S e t t i n g s and from the following:  
Only install and use applications and other software  
from sources that offer adequate security and  
protection against harmful software.  
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select an access point to use to  
connect to the service provider's server.  
A u t o m a t i c o p e n — Select whether you want the  
downloaded item or application to open  
automatically after the download is completed.  
P r e v i e w c o n f i r m a t i o n — Select whether you want  
a confirmation query to be shown before  
previewing an item.  
S e l e c t c a t a l o g s , f o l d e r s , a n d  
i t e m s  
To update the Download! content, select O p t i o n s >  
B u y c o n f i r m a t i o n — Select whether you want a  
confirmation query to be shown before buying an  
item.  
R e f r e s h l i s t .  
To hide a folder or a catalog from the list, for example,  
to view only items that you use frequently, select  
O p t i o n s > H i d e . To make the items visible again,  
select O p t i o n s > S h o w a l l .  
S o f t w a r e u p d a t e s  
To buy the selected item, select O p t i o n s > B u y . A  
submenu opens, where you can select the version of  
the item and view price information.  
Nokia may produce software updates that may offer  
new features, enhanced functions, or improved  
performance. You may be able to request these  
updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC  
application. To update the device software, you need  
the Nokia Software Updater application and a  
To download an item that is free of charge, select  
O p t i o n s > G e t .  
1 1 1  
           
compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, or  
Vista operating system, broadband internet access,  
and a compatible data cable to connect your device to  
the PC.  
To get more information and to download the Nokia  
Software Updater application, visit www.nokia-  
asia.com/softwareupdate or your local Nokia website.  
T i p : To check the software version in your  
device, enter * # 0 0 0 0 # in the standby mode.  
1 1 2  
S e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s .  
F a c t o r y s e t t i n g s — Restore the original settings of  
the device.  
You can define and modify various settings of your  
device. Modifying these settings affects the operation  
of your device across several applications.  
P o s i t i o n i n g — Define the positioning method and  
server for GPS-based applications.  
Some settings may be preset for the device or sent to  
you in a special message by your service provider. You  
may not be able to change such settings.  
P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >  
Select the setting you want to edit to do the following:  
P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n .  
Switch between two values, such as on or off.  
Select a value from a list.  
D i s p l a y s e t t i n g s  
To define the level of light that the device needs before  
switching on the backlight, select D i s p l a y > L i g h t  
s e n s o r .  
To change the text size, select D i s p l a y > F o n t s i z e .  
Open a text editor to enter a value.  
Open a slider to decrease or increase the value by  
scrolling left or right.  
To adjust the length of time the display can be left idle  
before the screen saver is activated, select D i s p l a y >  
P o w e r s a v e r t i m e - o u t .  
G e n e r a l s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l .  
To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select  
Select from the following:  
D i s p l a y > W e l c o m e n o t e / l o g o . You can either  
P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n — Change the display settings and choose the default welcome note, enter your own text,  
personalise the device.  
or select an image.  
D a t e a n d t i m e — Change the date and time.  
E n h a n c e m e n t — Define the settings for your  
enhancements.  
To set how quickly the display dims after the last  
keypress, select D i s p l a y > L i g h t t i m e - o u t .  
1 1 3  
S e c u r i t y — Define the security settings.  
         
To set the volume level of the ringing tone, select  
S t a n d b y m o d e s e t t i n g s  
T o n e s > R i n g i n g v o l u m e .  
To select whether to use the active standby, select  
To set the various alert tones, selectT o n e s > M e s s a g e  
a l e r t t o n e , E - m a i l a l e r t t o n e , C a l e n d a r a l a r m t o n e ,  
or C l o c k a l a r m t o n e .  
S t a n d b y m o d e > A c t i v e s t a n d b y .  
To assign shortcuts for the scroll key and selection keys,  
select S t a n d b y m o d e > S h o r t c u t s . These shortcuts  
are not available in the active standby.  
To set the device to vibrate when you receive a call,  
select T o n e s > V i b r a t i n g a l e r t .  
To assign shortcuts to applications, select S t a n d b y  
To set the volume level of the device keypad tones,  
m o d e > S t a n d b y a p p s .  
select T o n e s > K e y p a d t o n e s .  
To select whether to show or hide the operator logo,  
To set the warning tones on or off, select T o n e s >  
select S t a n d b y m o d e > O p e r a t o r l o g o > O n or O f f .  
W a r n i n g t o n e s .  
To select the Inbox or the mailbox that is shown in the  
active standby, select S t a n d b y m o d e > A c t i v e  
s t a n d b y m a i l b o x .  
L a n g u a g e s e t t i n g s  
To set the language used on the device display, select  
To select the plug-ins that are shown in the active  
standby, select S t a n d b y m o d e > A c t i v e s t a n d b y  
p l u g - i n s . You can, for example, see how many voice  
mails you have. The available plug-ins may vary.  
L a n g u a g e > P h o n e l a n g u a g e .  
To select the language in which you write notes and  
messages, select L a n g u a g e > W r i t i n g l a n g u a g e .  
To select whether to use the predictive text input,  
T o n e s e t t i n g s  
select L a n g u a g e > P r e d i c t i v e t e x t .  
To select a ringing tone for voice calls, select T o n e s >  
N o t i f i c a t i o n l i g h t  
R i n g i n g t o n e .  
You can set the notification light on the cover of your  
device to blink when you have received a new message  
or when you have missed a phone call.  
To select a ringing tone for video calls, select T o n e s >  
V i d e o c a l l t o n e .  
To set the ringing type, select T o n e s > R i n g i n g  
t y p e . You can also set the device to sound a ringing  
tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the  
caller and the selected ringing tone, when someone  
from your contacts list calls you. Select T o n e s > S a y  
c a l l e r ' s n a m e .  
To set the length of time you want the notification light  
to blink, select N o t i f i c a t i o n l i g h t > B l i n k l i g h t f o r .  
To select of which events you want to be notified, select  
N o t i f i c a t i o n l i g h t > N o t i f i e d e v e n t s .  
1 1 4  
               
To determine which profile is activated when you  
attach an enhancement to your device, select D e f a u l t  
p r o f i l e .  
D a t e a n d t i m e s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > D a t e  
a n d t i m e .  
To let the deviceanswer phone calls automatically after  
5 seconds when an enhancement is attached, select  
A u t o m a t i c a n s w e r > O n . If the ringing type is set to  
B e e p o n c e or S i l e n t in the selected profile, the  
automatic answer is disabled.  
To set the current date and time, select D a t e and  
T i m e .  
To define your time zone, select T i m e z o n e .  
To update the time, date, and time zone information  
automatically (network service), select N e t w o r k  
o p e r a t o r t i m e > A u t o - u p d a t e .  
To illuminate the device while it is attached to an  
enhancement, select L i g h t s > O n .  
To select whether to use the 12-hour or 24-hour clock  
system and with which symbol to separate hours and  
minutes, select T i m e f o r m a t and T i m e s e p a r a t o r .  
S e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >  
To determine the date format and separator, select  
S e c u r i t y .  
D a t e f o r m a t and D a t e s e p a r a t o r .  
Define the following security settings:  
To define the clock type, select C l o c k t y p e >  
P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d — Adjust the security settings  
A n a l o g u e or D i g i t a l .  
for your device and SIM card.  
C e r t i f i c a t e m a n a g e m e n t — Manage your security  
certificates.  
To select the tone for the alarm clock, select C l o c k  
a l a r m t o n e .  
S e c u r i t y m o d u l e — Manage your security module.  
To determine the week days that are work days for you,  
Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency  
numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the  
emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks.  
When you change a code, enter the current code, then  
the new code twice.  
select W o r k d a y s .  
E n h a n c e m e n t s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >  
E n h a n c e m e n t .  
D e v i c e a n d S I M c a r d s e c u r i t y  
To change the PIN code, select P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d >  
P I N c o d e . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The  
PIN code protects your SIM card against unauthorised  
use and is provided with the SIM card. After three  
C o m m o n e n h a n c e m e n t s e t t i n g s  
With most enhancements, you can do the following:  
1 1 5  
               
consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is  
power on. Documents, contact information, calendar  
blocked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock entries, and files are unaffected.  
it before you can use the SIM card again.  
To set the keypad to lock automatically after a defined  
T e l e p h o n e s e t t i n g s  
period, select P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d > K e y p a d  
a u t o l o c k p e r i o d .  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e .  
To set a time-out after which the device is  
automatically locked and can be used only if the correct  
lock code is entered, select P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d >  
P h o n e a u t o l o c k p e r i o d . Enter a number for the time-  
out in minutes, or select N o n e to set off the autolock  
period. When the device is locked, you can still answer  
incoming calls, and calls may still be possible to the  
official emergency number programmed into your  
device.  
Select from the following:  
C a l l — Define general call settings.  
C a l l d i v e r t — Define your call divert settings. See  
"Call divert," p. 37.  
C a l l b a r r i n g — Define your call barring settings. See  
"Call barring," p. 38.  
N e t w o r k — Adjust the network settings.  
To set a new lock code, select P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d >  
L o c k c o d e . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the  
current code and then the new code twice. The new  
code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphabets and  
digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase  
alphabets are possible. The device notifies you if the  
lock code is not properly formatted.  
To set the device to ask for the lock code when an  
unknown, new SIM card is inserted into your device,  
select P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d > L o c k i f S I M c a r d  
c h a n g e d . The device maintains a list of SIM cards that  
are recognised as the owners cards.  
C a l l s e t t i n g s  
To display your phone number to the person you are  
calling, select C a l l > S e n d m y c a l l e r I D > Y e s . To let  
the network determine whether your caller ID is sent,  
select S e t b y n e t w o r k .  
To display your net call address to the person you are  
calling using a net call, select C a l l > S e n d m y i n t e r n e t  
c a l l I D > Y e s .  
To be notified of a new incoming call while you have a  
call in progress, select C a l l > C a l l w a i t i n g >  
O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e . To check if the function is active  
on the network, select O p t i o n s > C h e c k s t a t u s .  
To select whether net calls alert or not, select C a l l >  
I n t e r n e t c a l l a l e r t . You are notified of missed net calls  
with a notification.  
R e s t o r e o r i g i n a l s e t t i n g s  
To restore the original device settings, select F a c t o r y  
s e t t i n g s . To do this, you need your device lock code.  
After resetting, the device may take a longer time to  
1 1 6  
         
To set the default call type, select C a l l > D e f a u l t c a l l  
t y p e and select V o i c e c a l l if you make a GSM calls, or  
I n t e r n e t c a l l if you make net calls.  
To send a text message automatically to the person  
who is calling you informing why you cannot answer  
the incoming call, select C a l l > R e j e c t c a l l w i t h  
S M S > Y e s . To set the text for the message, select  
C a l l > M e s s a g e t e x t .  
U S B — Edit the data cable settings. See "Data  
cable," p. 91.  
A c c e s s p o i n t s — Set up new or edit existing access  
points. Some or all access points may be preset for  
your device by your service provider, and you may  
not be able to create, edit, or remove them.  
P a c k e t d a t a — Determine when packet data  
connections are used, and enter the access point if  
you use your device as a modem for a computer.  
W i r e l e s s L A N — Determine if the device displays an  
indicator when a WLAN is available, and how often  
the device searches for networks.  
N e t w o r k s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e >  
S I P s e t t i n g s View or create session initiation  
protocol (SIP) profiles.  
N e t w o r k .  
I n t e r n e t t e l . — Define settings for net calls.  
C o n f i g u r a t i o n s — View and delete trusted servers  
from which your device may receive configuration  
settings.  
To select the network mode, select N e t w o r k m o d e  
and D u a l m o d e , U M T S , or G S M . In the dual mode, the  
device switches automatically between networks.  
To select the operator, select O p e r a t o r s e l e c t i o n and  
M a n u a l to choose from available networks, or  
A u t o m a t i c to have the device select the network  
automatically.  
To set the device to indicate when it is used in Micro  
Cellular Network (MCN), select C e l l i n f o d i s p l a y >  
O n .  
A P N c o n t r o l — Restrict packet data connections.  
See "Restrict packet data," p. 122.  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
A c c e s s p o i n t s .  
An internet access point is a collection of settings,  
which define how the device creates a data connection  
to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services  
or to browse web pages, you must first define access  
points for these services.  
C o n n e c t i o n s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n .  
Select from the following:  
Some or all access points may be preset for your device  
by your service provider, and you may not be able to  
create, edit, or remove them.  
B l u e t o o t h — Edit the Bluetooth settings. See "Send  
and receive data with Bluetooth," p. 93.  
1 1 7  
         
To create a new access point, select O p t i o n s > N e w  
To have an indicator displayed when there is a WLAN  
a c c e s s p o i n t or select an existing access point from the available in your current location, select S h o w W L A N  
list and then O p t i o n s > D u p l i c a t e a c c e s s p o i n t to use a v a i l a b i l i t y > Y e s .  
the access point as a basis for the new one.  
To select the interval for your device to scan for  
available WLANs and update the indicator, select S c a n  
f o r n e t w o r k s . This setting is not available unless you  
P a c k e t d a t a ( G P R S ) s e t t i n g s  
select S h o w W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y > Y e s .  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
P a c k e t d a t a .  
A d v a n c e d W L A N s e t t i n g s  
Your device supports packet data connections, such as  
GPRS in the GSM network. When you are using your  
device in GSM and UMTS networks, it is possible to have  
multiple data connections active at the same time;  
access points can share a data connection, and data  
connections remain active, for example, during voice  
calls. See "Connection manager," p. 100.  
Select O p t i o n s > A d v a n c e d s e t t i n g s . The advanced  
WLAN settings are normally defined automatically, and  
changing them is not recommended.  
To edit the settings manually, select A u t o m a t i c  
c o n f i g u r a t i o n > D i s a b l e d , and define the following:  
L o n g r e t r y l i m i t — Enter the maximum number of  
transmission attempts if the device does not receive  
a receiving acknowledgement signal from the  
network.  
To define the packet data settings, select P a c k e t d a t a  
c o n n e c t i o n and select W h e n a v a i l a b l e to register the  
device to the packet data network when you switch the  
device on in a supported network, or W h e n n e e d e d to  
establish a packet data connection only when an  
application or action requires it. Select A c c e s s p o i n t  
and enter the access point name provided by your  
service provider to use the device as a packet data  
modem to your computer.  
S h o r t r e t r y l i m i t — Enter the maximum number of  
transmission attempts if the device does not receive  
a clear-to-send signal from the network.  
R T S t h r e s h o l d — Select the data packet size at  
which the WLAN access point device issues a request  
to send before sending the packet.  
These settings affect all access points for packet data  
T X p o w e r l e v e l — Select the power level of your  
device when sending data.  
connections.  
R a d i o m e a s u r e m e n t s — Enable or disable the  
radio measurements.  
W L A N s e t t i n g s  
P o w e r s a v i n g — Select whether to use the WLAN  
power saving mechanism to save the power in the  
device battery. Using the power saving mechanism  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
W i r e l e s s L A N .  
1 1 8  
           
enhances the battery performance but may weaken  
WLAN interoperability.  
W E P k e y s e t t i n g s  
In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same  
To restore all settings to their original values, select  
WEP key.  
O p t i o n s > R e s t o r e d e f a u l t s .  
Select W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s > W E P k e y s e t t i n g s  
and from the following:  
W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s  
W E P e n c r y p t i o n — Select the desired WEP  
encryption key length.  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
A c c e s s p o i n t s > O p t i o n s > N e w a c c e s s p o i n t , or  
select an access point and O p t i o n s > E d i t .  
W E P k e y f o r m a t — Select whether you want to  
enter the WEP key data in A S C I I or H e x a d e c i m a l  
format.  
In the access point settings, select W L A N s e c u r i t y  
W E P k e y — Enter the WEP key data.  
m o d e and the desired mode.  
8 0 2 . 1 x s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s  
W E P s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s  
Select W E P as the WLAN security mode.  
Select 8 0 2 . 1 x as the WLAN security mode.  
8 0 2 . 1 x authenticates and authorises devices to access  
a wireless network, and prevents access if the  
authorisation process fails.  
The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method  
encrypts data before it is transmitted. Access to the  
network is denied to users who do not have the  
required WEP keys. When the WEP security mode is in  
use, and your device receives a data packet not  
encrypted with the WEP keys, the data is discarded.  
Select W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s and fromthe following:  
W P A / W P A 2 — Select E A P (Extensible  
Authentication Protocol) or P r e - s h a r e d k e y (a  
secret key used for device identification).  
E A P p l u g - i n s e t t i n g s — If you selected W P A /  
W P A 2 > E A P , select which EAP plug-ins defined in  
your device to use with the access point.  
P r e - s h a r e d k e y — If you selected W P A / W P A 2 >  
P r e - s h a r e d k e y , enter the shared private key that  
identifies your device to the WLAN to which you  
connect.  
In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same  
WEP key.  
Select W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s and fromthe following:  
W E P k e y i n u s e — Select the desired WEP key.  
A u t h e n t i c a t i o n t y p e — Select O p e n or S h a r e d .  
W E P k e y s e t t i n g s — Edit the settings for the WEP  
key.  
1 1 9  
               
E A P p l u g - i n s  
W P A s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s  
1. To define the EAP plug-in settings, select O p t i o n s >  
N e w a c c e s s p o i n t and define an access point that  
uses WLAN as a data bearer.  
Select W P A / W P A 2 as the WLAN security mode.  
Select W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s and fromthe following:  
W P A / W P A 2 — Select E A P (Extensible  
2. Select 8 0 2 . 1 x or W P A / W P A 2 as the security mode.  
Authentication Protocol) or P r e - s h a r e d k e y (a  
secret key used for device identification).  
E A P p l u g - i n s e t t i n g s — If you select W P A /  
W P A 2 > E A P , select which EAP plug-ins defined in  
your device to use with the access point.  
P r e - s h a r e d k e y — If you select W P A / W P A 2 >  
P r e - s h a r e d k e y , enter the shared private key that  
identifies your device to the WLAN to which you  
connect.  
3. Select W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s > W P A / W P A 2 >  
E A P > E A P p l u g - i n s e t t i n g s .  
U s e E A P p l u g - i n s  
To use an EAP plug-in when you connect to a WLAN  
using the access point, select the desired plug-in and  
O p t i o n s > E n a b l e . The EAP plug-ins enabled for use  
with this access point have a check mark next to them.  
To not use a plug-in, select O p t i o n s > D i s a b l e .  
W P A 2 o n l y m o d e — To allow both TKIP and AES  
(Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption, select  
O f f . To allow AES only, select O n  
To edit the EAP plug-in settings, select O p t i o n s >  
E d i t .  
To change the priorityof theEAP plug-in settings, select  
O p t i o n s > R a i s e p r i o r i t y to attempt to use the plug-  
in before other plug-ins when connecting to the  
network with the access point, or O p t i o n s > L o w e r  
p r i o r i t y to use this plug-in for network authentication  
after attempting to use other plug-ins.  
W i r e l e s s L A N p l u g i n s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
A c c e s s p o i n t s .  
The EAP (extensible authentication protocol) plug-ins  
are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless  
devices and authentication servers, and the different  
EAP plug-ins make possible the use of various EAP  
methods (network service).  
See the device help for more information on EAP  
plugins.  
S e s s i o n i n i t i a t i o n p r o t o c o l  
( S I P ) s e t t i n g s  
You can view the EAP plug-ins currently installed in  
your device (network service).  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
S I P s e t t i n g s .  
1 2 0  
               
Session initiation protocols (SIP) are used for creating,  
modifying, and terminating certain types of  
E d i t S I P p r o x y s e r v e r s  
Select O p t i o n s > N e w S I P p r o f i l e or E d i t > P r o x y  
communication sessions with one or more participants  
(network service). Typical communication sessions are  
video sharing and net calls. SIP profiles include settings  
for these sessions. The SIP profile used by default for a  
communication session is underlined.  
s e r v e r .  
Proxy servers are intermediate servers between a  
browsing service and its users used by some service  
providers. These servers may provide additional  
security and speed up access to the service.  
To create a SIP profile, select O p t i o n s > N e w S I P  
p r o f i l e > U s e d e f a u l t p r o f i l e or U s e e x i s t i n g  
p r o f i l e .  
To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for  
communication sessions, select O p t i o n s > D e f a u l t  
p r o f i l e .  
Select from the following:  
P r o x y s e r v e r a d d r e s s — Enter the host name or IP  
address of the proxy server in use.  
R e a l m — Enter the proxy server realm.  
U s e r n a m e and P a s s w o r d — Enter your user name  
and password for the proxy server.  
A l l o w l o o s e r o u t i n g — Select if loose routing is  
allowed.  
E d i t S I P p r o f i l e s  
Select O p t i o n s > E d i t , and select from the following:  
T r a n s p o r t t y p e — Select U D P , A u t o , or T C P .  
P o r t — Enter the port number of the proxy server.  
P r o f i l e n a m e — Enter a name for the SIP profile.  
S e r v i c e p r o f i l e — Select I E T F or N o k i a 3 G P P .  
D e f a u l t a c c e s s p o i n t — Select the access point to  
use for the internet connection.  
E d i t r e g i s t r a t i o n s e r v e r s  
Select O p t i o n s > N e w S I P p r o f i l e or E d i t > R e g i s t r a r  
P u b l i c u s e r n a m e — Enter your user name received  
from your service provider.  
s e r v e r .  
U s e c o m p r e s s i o n — Select if compression is used.  
R e g i s t r a t i o n — Select the registration mode.  
U s e s e c u r i t y — Select if security negotiation is  
used.  
Select from the following:  
R e g i s t r a r s e r v e r a d d r e s s — Enter the host name  
or IP address of the registrar server in use.  
R e a l m — Enter the registrar server realm.  
U s e r n a m e and P a s s w o r d — Enter your user name  
and password for the registrar server.  
T r a n s p o r t t y p e — Select U D P , A u t o , or T C P .  
P o r t — Enter the port number of the registrar  
server.  
P r o x y s e r v e r — Enter the proxy server settings for  
this SIP profile.  
R e g i s t r a r s e r v e r — Enter the registration server  
settings for this SIP profile.  
1 2 1  
           
access point control service. Contact your service  
provider for more information.  
To restrict the packet data connections from your  
device, select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e r e s t r i c t i o n s . You  
need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate access  
point control or to edit the packet data access points  
on the control list.  
N e t c a l l s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
I n t e r n e t t e l . .  
To create a new net call profile, select O p t i o n s > N e w  
p r o f i l e .  
To edit an existing profile, select O p t i o n s > E d i t .  
To add access points that can be used for packet data  
connections to the control list, select O p t i o n s > A d d  
n a m e m a n u a l l y . To enable connections to an  
operator-provided access point, create an empty  
access point.  
C o n f i g u r a t i o n s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
C o n f i g u r a t i o n s .  
To remove access points from the list, select O p t i o n s >  
You can receive messages from your service provider  
or company information management containing  
configuration settings for trusted servers. These  
settings are automatically saved in C o n f i g u r a t i o n s .  
You may receive configuration settings for access  
points, multimedia, or e-mail services, and IM or  
synchronisation settings from trusted servers.  
R e m o v e .  
A p p l i c a t i o n s e t t i n g s  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > A p p l i c a t i o n s .  
Select an application from the list to adjust its settings.  
To delete configurations for a trusted server, select  
O p t i o n s > D e l e t e . The configuration settings for  
other applications provided by this server are also  
deleted.  
R e s t r i c t p a c k e t d a t a  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
A P N c o n t r o l .  
With the access point control service, you can restrict  
packet data connections from your device to certain  
access points only. Your SIM card may not support the  
1 2 2  
               
S h o r t c u t s  
Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in  
your device. Shortcuts can make the use of the  
applications more efficient.  
Number key (2– Call a phone number using speed  
9)  
dialling. You must first activate  
speed dialling at M e n u > T o o l s >  
S e t t i n g s > P h o n e > C a l l >  
S p e e d d i a l l i n g > O n .  
G e n e r a l s h o r t c u t s  
W e b  
G e n e r a l s h o r t c u t s  
*
Zoom in the page.  
Zoom out the page.  
Open the search dialog.  
View the active pages.  
View the page overview.  
Power key  
Press and hold to switch your device  
on and off.  
#
2
5
8
9
Press once to switch between  
profiles.  
A c t i v e s t a n d b y m o d e  
Left selection  
Lock and unlock the keypad.  
Open the dialog for entering a new  
key + *  
web address.  
Call key  
0
Open the call log.  
0
Open the bookmarks folder.  
Press and hold to open your home  
I m a g e v i e w e r  
page in the Web browser.  
Call key  
0
Send the image.  
Zoom out.  
Zoom in.  
#
1
Press and hold to switch between  
the S i l e n t and G e n e r a l profiles.  
Press and hold to call your voice  
5
mailbox.  
1 2 3  
     
7
Zoom in. Press twice for the full  
screen size.  
4
6
2
8
3
1
*
Scroll left in the zoomed image.  
Scroll right in the zoomed image.  
Scroll up in the zoomed image.  
Scroll down in the zoomed image.  
Rotate clockwise.  
Rotate counterclockwise.  
Switch between the full screen size  
and normal view.  
1 2 4  
G l o s s a r y  
G l o s s a r y  
but this translation is needed because  
the internet is based on IP addresses.  
3G  
3rd generation mobile  
DTMF tones Dual Tone Multi-Frequency tones. The  
DTMF system is used by touch-tone  
telephones. DTMF assigns a specific  
frequency, or tone, to each key so that  
it can easily be identified by a  
communications. A digital system for  
mobile communications which aims at  
global use and provides increased  
bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device  
user access a wide variety of services,  
such as multimedia.  
microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you  
to communicate with voice mailboxes,  
computerised telephony systems, and  
so on.  
Ad-hoc  
operating  
mode  
A WLAN network mode where two or  
more devices connect to each other  
using WLAN directly without a WLAN  
access point.  
Cookies are little pieces of information,  
given by the server to you, to store  
information about your visits to a web  
site. When you accept cookies, the  
server is able to evaluate your use of  
the web site, what you are interested  
in, what you want to read, and so on.  
EAP  
Extensible authentication protocol.  
EAP plug-ins are used in wireless  
networks to authenticate wireless  
devices and authentication servers.  
Cookies  
EGPRS  
Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is similar to  
GPRS, but it enables faster connection.  
For more information on the  
availability of EGPRS and data transfer  
speed, contact your service provider.  
DNS  
Domain name service. An internet  
service that translates domain names  
such as www.nokia.com into IP  
addresses such as 192.100.124.195.  
Domain names are easier to remember  
1 2 5  
 
GPRS  
General packet radio service. GPRS  
enables wireless access for mobile  
phones to data networks (network  
service). GPRS uses packet data  
technology where information is sent  
in short bursts of data over the mobile  
network. The benefit of sending data  
in packets is that the network is  
occupied only when sending or  
receiving data. As GPRS uses the  
network efficiently, it allows for quick  
data connection setup and fast data  
transmission speeds.  
HTTP  
Hypertext transfer protocol. A  
document transfer protocol used in the  
web.  
HTTP over a secure connection.  
Internet mail access protocol, version  
4. A protocol used for accessing your  
remote mailbox.  
An access point is where your device  
HTTPS  
IMAP4  
Internet  
access point connects to a network. To use e-mail  
and multimedia services or to connect  
to the internet and browse web pages,  
you must first define internet access  
points for these services.  
You must subscribe to the GPRS service.  
For availability and subscription to  
GPRS, contact your service provider.  
Infrastructur A WLAN network mode where devices  
e operating are connected to WLAN using a WLAN  
During a voice call, you cannot  
establish a GPRS connection, and any  
existing GPRS connection is put on hold  
unless the network supports dual  
transfer mode.  
mode  
PIN  
access point.  
Personal identity number. The PIN  
code protects your device from  
unauthorised use. The PIN code is  
supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN  
code request is selected, the code is  
required each time the device is  
switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to  
8 digits long.  
The PIN2 code is supplied with some  
SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to  
access certain functions supported by  
the SIM card. The length of the PIN2  
code is 4 to 8 digits.  
GPS  
Global positioning system. GPS is a  
worldwide radio navigation system.  
HSDPA  
High-speed downlink packet access.  
HSDPA brings high-speed data delivery  
to 3G terminals, ensuring that users  
requiring effective multimedia  
PIN2  
capabilities benefit from data rates  
previously unavailable because of  
limitations in theradio access network.  
1 2 6  
browse the web faster than previously  
possible while simultaneously  
speaking on the phone.  
PIN code used in UMTS network.  
UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is  
required to change a blocked UPIN  
code or PIN2 code. The length of the  
code is 8 digits.  
POP3  
Post office protocol, version 3. A  
common mail protocol that can be  
used for accessing your remote  
mailbox.  
PIN Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2  
codes are required to change a blocked  
PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively.  
The length of the code is 8 digits.  
Session initiation protocol. SIP is used  
for creating, modifying, and  
terminating certain types of  
communication sessions with one or  
more participants.  
UPIN  
UPUK  
PUK and  
PUK2  
SIP  
USIM  
SIM card used in UMTS network.  
USSD  
A service request, such as request to  
activate an application or configure  
various settings remotely, that you can  
send to your operator or service  
provider with your device.  
command  
SSID  
Service set identifier. SSID is the name  
that identifies the specific WLAN.  
VoIP  
VPN  
Voice over internet protocol  
Streaming  
Streaming audio and video files means  
playing them directly from the web  
without downloading them first to  
your device.  
technology. VoIP is a set of protocols  
that facilitate phone calls over an IP  
network, such as the internet.  
Virtual private network. VPN creates a  
secure connection to compatible  
corporate intranet and services, such  
as e-mail.  
Wireless application protocol. WAP is  
an international standard for wireless  
communication.  
Wired equivalent privacy. WEP is an  
encryption method that encrypts data  
before it is transmitted in WLAN.  
Wireless local area network.  
UMTS  
Universal mobile telecommunications  
system. UMTS is a 3G mobile  
communication system. Besides voice  
and data, UMTS enables audio and  
video delivery to wireless devices.  
WAP  
WEP  
When you use your device in GSM and  
UMTS networks, multiple data  
connections can be active at the same  
time, and access points can share a  
data connection. In the UMTS network,  
data connections remain active during  
voice calls. You can, for example,  
1 2 7  
WLAN  
WPA  
Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security  
method for WLAN.  
WPA2  
Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security  
method for WLAN.  
1 2 8  
N o k i a o r i g i n a l e n h a n c e m e n t s  
Installation of any complex car enhancements must  
be made by qualified personnel only.  
W a r n i n g : Use only batteries, chargers, and  
enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this  
particular model. The use of any other types may  
invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be  
dangerous.  
B a t t e r y  
Type  
BP-6MT  
An extensive range of  
Talk time  
Up to  
Standby  
min Up to  
enhancements is available for  
your device. Please visit  
www.nokia-asia.com/  
3
h
06  
1
3
days  
enhancements for more details.  
For availability of the  
I m p o r t a n t : Battery talk and standby times are  
estimates only and depend on signal strength, network  
conditions, features used, battery age and condition,  
temperatures to which battery is exposed, use in  
digital mode, and many other factors. The amount of  
time a device is used for calls will affect its standby  
time. Likewise, the amount of time that the device is  
turned on and in the standby mode will affect its talk  
time.  
enhancements, please check  
with your local dealer.  
E n h a n c e m e n t s  
Practical rules about accessories and enhancements  
Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the  
reach of small children.  
When you disconnect the power cord of any  
accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug,  
not the cord.  
Check regularly that enhancements installed in a  
1 2 9  
vehicle are mounted and are operating properly.  
       
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Q : W h y c a n ’ t I f i n d m y f r i e n d ’ s d e v i c e w h i l e u s i n g  
B l u e t o o t h c o n n e c t i v i t y ?  
To see frequently asked questions about your device,  
visit the product support pages at the Nokia web site.  
Q : W h a t i s m y l o c k , P I N , o r P U K c o d e ?  
A: Check that both devices are compatible, have  
activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in the  
hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the  
two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that  
there are no walls or other obstructions between the  
devices.  
A: The default lock code is 1 2 3 4 5 . If you forget or lose  
the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget  
or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received  
such a code, contact your network service provider.  
Q : H o w d o I c l o s e a n a p p l i c a t i o n t h a t i s n o t  
r e s p o n d i n g ?  
Q : W h y c a n ’ t I e n d a B l u e t o o t h c o n n e c t i o n ?  
A: If another device is connected to your device, you  
can end the connection using the other device or by  
deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Select M e n u >  
C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h > B l u e t o o t h > O f f .  
A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the  
application, and press the backspace key to close the  
application.  
Q : W h y d o i m a g e s l o o k s m u d g y ?  
Q : W h y c a n ' t I s e e a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t e v e n t h o u g h  
I k n o w I ' m w i t h i n i t s r a n g e ?  
A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are  
clean.  
A: Check that the Offline profile is not in use in your  
Q : W h y d o m i s s i n g , d i s c o l o u r e d , o r b r i g h t d o t s  
a p p e a r o n t h e s c r e e n e v e r y t i m e I s w i t c h o n m y  
d e v i c e ?  
device.  
The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set  
identifier (SSID). You can only access networks that use  
a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have  
created a WLAN access point for the network on your  
Nokia device  
A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some  
displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or  
off. This is normal, not a fault.  
Check that the WLAN access point is not on channels  
12-13, as they cannot be associated with.  
1 3 0  
   
Q : H o w d o I s w i t c h W L A N o f f o n m y N o k i a d e v i c e ?  
Q : W h y d o I h a v e p r o b l e m s w i t h t h e s e c u r i t y m o d e ?  
A: The WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when  
A: Check that you have configured the security mode  
you are not trying to connect, not connected to another correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses.  
access point, or not scanning for available networks.  
To check the security mode the network uses, select  
To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > C o n n . m g r . > A c t i v e d a t a  
that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less  
often, for available networks in the background. WLAN  
switches off in between background scans.  
c o n n e c t i o n s > O p t i o n s > D e t a i l s .  
Check also the following: you have the correct WPA  
mode (preshared key or EAP), you have disabled all EAP  
To stop the background scans, select M e n u > T o o l s > types that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings  
S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n > W i r e l e s s L A N > S h o w  
W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y > N e v e r . You can still manually  
scan for available WLAN networks and connect to WLAN  
networks as usual.  
are correct (passwords, user names, certificates).  
Q : W h y c a n ’ t I s e l e c t a c o n t a c t f o r m y m e s s a g e ?  
A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an  
address, or an e-mail address. Select M e n u >  
C o n t a c t s , and edit the contact card.  
To increase the background scan interval, select S h o w  
W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y > Y e s , and define the interval in  
S c a n f o r n e t w o r k s .  
Q : T h e n o t e R e t r i e v i n g m e s s a g e i s s h o w n b r i e f l y .  
W h a t i s h a p p e n i n g ?  
Q : W h y c a n ' t I b r o w s e t h e w e b e v e n t h o u g h t h e  
W L A N c o n n e c t i o n i s w o r k i n g a n d t h e I P s e t t i n g s  
a r e c o r r e c t ?  
A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia  
message from the multimedia messaging centre. This  
note is shown if you have set M u l t i m e d i a r e t r i e v a l to  
A l w a y s a u t o m a t i c in the multimedia message  
settings. Check that the settings for multimedia  
messaging are defined correctly and that there are no  
mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. See  
"Multimedia message settings," p. 61.  
A: Check that you have defined the HTTP/ HTTPS proxy  
settings correctly in the advanced settings of your  
WLAN access point.  
Q : H o w d o I c h e c k t h e s i g n a l q u a l i t y o f m y W L A N  
c o n n e c t i o n ?  
Q : H o w c a n I e n d t h e d a t a c o n n e c t i o n w h e n t h e  
d e v i c e s t a r t s a d a t a c o n n e c t i o n a g a i n a n d a g a i n ?  
A: Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > C o n n . m g r . >  
A c t i v e d a t a c o n n e c t i o n s > O p t i o n s > D e t a i l s . If  
the signal quality is weak or moderate, you may  
encounter connection problems. Try again closer to  
the access point.  
A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia  
message from the multimedia message centre. To stop  
the device from making a data connection, select  
M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >  
M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e > M u l t i m e d i a r e t r i e v a l >  
M a n u a l to have the multimedia messaging centre save  
1 3 1  
messages to be retrieved later, or O f f to ignore all  
incoming multimedia messages. If you select M a n u a l ,  
you receive a notification when there is a new  
multimedia message that you can retrieve in the  
multimedia message centre. If you select O f f , the  
device does not make any network connections related  
to multimedia messaging.  
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >  
P a c k e t d a t a > P a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n > W h e n  
n e e d e d .  
Prevent the device from automatically downloading  
new maps in the Maps application. Select M e n u >  
T o o l s > M a p s > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >  
N e t w o r k > U s e n e t w o r k > O f f .  
To set the device to use a packet data connection only  
if you start an application or action that needs it, select  
M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n > P a c k e t  
d a t a > P a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n > W h e n n e e d e d .  
Change the time-out after which the backlight is  
switched off. Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >  
G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n > D i s p l a y > L i g h t  
t i m e - o u t .  
If this does not help, switch the device off, and switch  
Close the applications you do not use. Press and hold  
the home key. Scroll to the application, and press  
the backspace key to close the application.  
it on again.  
Q : W h y d o I h a v e p r o b l e m s c o n n e c t i n g t h e d e v i c e  
t o m y P C ?  
A: Ensure that you have the latest version of Nokia PC  
Suite and that it is installed and running on your  
compatible PC. For further information on how to use  
Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite  
or visit the support pages of the Nokia web site.  
Q : H o w d o I s a v e b a t t e r y p o w e r ?  
A: Many features in your device increase the demand  
on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To  
save battery power, do the following:  
Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it.  
Stop the background scans for WLAN. Select M e n u >  
T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n > W i r e l e s s  
L A N > S h o w W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y > N e v e r . You can  
still manually scan for available WLAN networks and  
connect to WLAN networks as usual.  
1 3 2  
Set the device to use a packet data connection only  
if you start an application or action that needs it.  
B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n  
Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-  
circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a  
coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the  
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery.  
(These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might  
happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery  
in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals  
may damage the battery or the connecting object.  
C h a r g i n g a n d  
d i s c h a r g i n g  
Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The  
battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of  
times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk  
and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal,  
replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries,  
and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved  
chargers designated for this device.  
Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a  
closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce  
the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to  
keep the battery between 15°C and 25°C (59°F and 77°  
F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work  
temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged.  
Battery performance is particularly limited in  
If a replacement battery is being used for the first time  
or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged  
period, it may be necessary to connect the charger,  
then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the  
battery.  
temperatures well below freezing.  
Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may  
explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged.  
Dispose of batteries according to local regulations.  
Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as  
household waste.  
Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the  
device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged  
battery connected to a charger, since overcharging  
may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged  
battery will lose its charge over time.  
Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the  
event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come  
in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a  
leak, flush your skin or eyes immediately with water,  
or seek medical help.  
If the battery is completely discharged, it may take  
several minutes before the charging indicator appears  
on the display or before any calls can be made.  
Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use  
1 3 3  
any charger or battery that is damaged.  
   
2. When you angle the hologram  
left, right, down and up, you  
should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on  
each side respectively.  
N o k i a b a t t e r y  
a u t h e n t i c a t i o n  
g u i d e l i n e s  
Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To  
check that you are getting an original Nokia battery,  
purchase it from an authorised Nokia dealer, and  
inspect the hologram label using the following steps:  
W h a t i f y o u r b a t t e r y i s n o t  
a u t h e n t i c ?  
Successful completion of the steps is not a total  
assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have  
any reason to believe that your battery is not an  
authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain  
from using it, and take it to the nearest authorised  
Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your  
authorised Nokia service point or dealer will inspect  
the battery for authenticity. If authenticity cannot be  
verified, return the battery to the place of purchase.  
If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the  
hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia battery,  
please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest  
authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance.  
The use of a battery that is not approved by the  
manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in  
poor performance and damage to your device and its  
enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or  
warranty applying to the device.  
To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit  
A u t h e n t i c a t e h o l o g r a m  
www.nokia.com/battery.  
1. When you look at the  
hologram on the label, you  
should see the Nokia  
connecting hands symbol  
from one angle and the Nokia  
Original Enhancements logo  
when looking from another  
angle.  
1 3 4  
     
C a r e a n d m a i n t e n a n c e  
Your device is a product of superior design and  
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The  
following suggestions will help you protect your  
warranty coverage.  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or  
strong detergents to clean the device.  
Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving  
parts and prevent proper operation.  
Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all  
types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals  
that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device  
does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the  
device to dry completely before replacing it.  
Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such  
ascamera, proximitysensor, and lightsensor lenses.  
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement  
antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or  
attachments could damage the device and may  
violate regulations governing radio devices.  
Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas.  
Its moving parts and electronic components can be  
damaged.  
Use chargers indoors.  
Always create a backup of data you want to keep,  
Do not store the device in hot areas. High  
temperatures can shorten the life of electronic  
devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain  
plastics.  
such as contacts and calendar notes.  
To reset the device from time to time for optimum  
performance, power off the device and remove the  
battery.  
Do not store the device in cold areas. When the  
device returns to its normal temperature, moisture  
can form inside the device and damage electronic  
circuit boards.  
These suggestions apply equally to your device,  
battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is  
not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized  
service facility for service.  
Do not attempt to open the device other than as  
instructed in this guide.  
Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough  
handling can break internal circuit boards and fine  
mechanics.  
1 3 5  
 
A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n  
S m a l l c h i l d r e n  
M e d i c a l d e v i c e s  
Your device and its enhancements may contain small  
Operation of any radio transmitting equipment,  
including wireless phones, may interfere with the  
functionality of inadequately protected medical  
devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the  
medical device to determine if they are adequately  
shielded from external RF energy or if you have any  
questions. Switch off your device in health care  
facilities when any regulations posted in these areas  
instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities  
may be using equipment that could be sensitive to  
external RF energy.  
parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children.  
O p e r a t i n g  
e n v i r o n m e n t  
This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used  
either in the normal use position against the ear or  
when positioned at least 2.2 centimeters (7/8 inches)  
away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or  
holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not  
contain metal and should position the device the  
above-stated distance from your body.  
I m p l a n t e d m e d i c a l d e v i c e s  
Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a  
minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches)  
should be maintained between a wireless device and  
an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or  
implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential  
interference with the medical device. Persons who  
have such devices should:  
To transmit data files or messages, this device requires  
a quality connection to the network. In some cases,  
transmission of data files or messages may be delayed  
until such a connection is available. Ensure the above  
separation distance instructions are followed until the  
transmission is completed.  
Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3  
centimeters (6 inches) from the medical device  
when the wireless device is turned on.  
Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials  
may be attracted to the device. Do not place credit  
cards or other magnetic storage media near the device,  
because information stored on them may be erased.  
1 3 6  
       
Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket.  
warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly  
that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is  
mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry  
flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the  
same compartment as the device, its parts, or  
enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag,  
remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not  
place objects, including installed or portable wireless  
equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag  
deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is  
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious  
injury could result.  
Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the  
medical device to minimize the potential for  
interference.  
Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is  
any reason to suspect that interference is taking  
place.  
Read and follow the directions from the  
manufacturer of their implanted medical device.  
If you have any questions about using your wireless  
device with an implanted medical device, consult your  
health care provider.  
Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited.  
Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The  
use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be  
dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the  
wireless telephone network, and may be illegal.  
H e a r i n g a i d s  
Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some  
hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your  
service provider.  
P o t e n t i a l l y e x p l o s i v e  
e n v i r o n m e n t s  
V e h i c l e s  
Switch off your device when in any area with a  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or  
inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor  
vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems,  
electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems,  
electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems.  
For more information, check with the manufacturer, or  
its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment  
that has been added.  
potentially explosive atmosphere, and obey all signs  
and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres  
include areas where you would normally be advised to  
turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could  
cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or  
even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points  
such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe  
restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel  
depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical  
plants; or where blasting operations are in progress.  
Only qualified personnel should service the device or  
install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or  
service may be dangerous and may invalidate any  
1 3 7  
     
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are  
often, but not always, clearly marked. They include  
below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage  
If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn  
those features off before you can make an emergency  
call. If the device is in the offline or flight profile mode,  
facilities and areas where the air contains chemicals or you may need to change the profile to activate the  
particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You  
phone function before you can make an emergency  
should check with the manufacturers of vehicles using call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more  
liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to information.  
determine if this device can be safely used in their  
vicinity.  
When making an emergency call, give all the necessary  
information as accurately as possible. Your wireless  
device may be the only means of communication at the  
scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given  
permission to do so.  
E m e r g e n c y c a l l s  
I m p o r t a n t : Wireless phones, including this  
device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks,  
landline networks, and user-programmed functions.  
Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be  
guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any  
wireless device for essential communications like  
medical emergencies.  
C E R T I F I C A T I O N  
I N F O R M A T I O N ( S A R )  
T h i s m o b i l e d e v i c e m e e t s g u i d e l i n e s f o r e x p o s u r e  
t o r a d i o w a v e s .  
Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver.  
It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to  
radio waves recommended by international  
To make an emergency call:  
1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for  
adequate signal strength.  
guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the  
independent scientific organization ICNIRP and include  
safety margins designed to assure the protection of all  
persons, regardless of age and health.  
Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is  
properly inserted in the device.  
2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear  
The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a  
unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption  
Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP  
the display and ready the device for calls.  
3. Enter the official emergency number for your  
present location. Emergency numbers vary by  
location.  
guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over  
10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using  
standard operating positions with the device  
1 3 8 4. Press the call key.  
transmitting at its highest certified power level in all  
   
tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an  
operating device can be below the maximum value  
because the device is designed to use only the power  
required to reach the network. That amount changes  
depending on a number of factors such as how close  
you are to a network base station. The highest SAR  
value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device  
at the ear is 1.40 W/kg.  
Use of device accessories and enhancements may  
result in different SAR values. SAR values may vary  
depending on national reporting and testing  
requirements and the network band. Additional SAR  
information may be provided under product  
information at www.nokia-asia.com.  
1 3 9  
M A N U F A C T U R E R ’ S L I M I T E D W A R R A N T Y  
This Limited Warranty is in addition to, and does not  
affect your legal (statutory) rights under your  
applicable national laws relating to the sale of  
consumer products.  
(hereinafter “Warranty Period”). The different  
Warranty Periods are:  
a) twelve (12) months for the mobile device and  
accessories (whether included in the mobile device  
sales package or sold separately) other than the  
consumable parts and accessories listed in (b) and (c)  
below;  
Nokia Corporation (“Nokia”) provides this Limited  
Warranty to person who has purchased the Nokia  
product(s) included in the sales package (“Product”).  
Nokia warrants to you that during the warranty period b) six (6) months for the following consumable parts  
Nokia or a Nokia authorized service company will in a  
commercially reasonable time remedy defects in  
materials, design and workmanship free of charge by  
repairing or, should Nokia in its absolute discretion  
deem it necessary, replacing the Product in accordance  
with this Limited Warranty (unless otherwise required  
by law). This Limited Warranty is only valid and  
enforceable in the country where you have purchased  
the Product provided that it is intended for sale in that  
country.  
and accessories: batteries, chargers, desk stands,  
headsets, cables and covers; and  
c) ninety (90) days for the media on which any software  
is provided, for example, CD-ROM or memory card  
As far as your national laws permit, the Warranty  
Period will not be extended or renewed or otherwise  
affected due to subsequent resale, repair or  
replacement of the Product. However, repaired part(s)  
will be warranted for the remainder of the original  
Warranty Period or for sixty (60) days from the date of  
repair, whichever is longer.  
W a r r a n t y p e r i o d  
The warranty period starts at the time of Product's  
original purchase by the first end-user. The Product  
may consist of several different parts and different  
parts may be covered by a different warranty period  
1 4 0  
   
whether included during installment, assembly,  
shipping or at any other time in the delivery chain or  
otherwise and in any way acquired by you. To the  
extent permitted by applicable law(s), Nokia does not  
warrant that any Nokia software will meet your  
requirements, will work in combination with any  
hardware or software applications provided by a third  
party, that the operation of the software will be  
uninterrupted or error free or that any defects in the  
software are correctable or will be corrected.  
H o w t o g e t w a r r a n t y  
s e r v i c e  
If you wish to make a claim under the Limited  
Warranty, you may call the Nokia call center (where this  
is available and please note national rates apply to  
calls) and/or where necessary, return your Product or  
the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a  
Nokia care center or Nokia designated service location.  
Information about Nokia care centers, Nokia  
2. This Limited Warranty does not cover a) normal wear  
and tear (including, without limitation, wear and tear  
of camera lenses, batteries or displays), b) transport  
costs, c) defects caused by rough handling (including,  
without limitation, defects caused by sharp items, by  
bending, compressing or dropping, etc.), d) defects or  
damage caused by misuse of the Product, including use  
that is contrary to the instructions provided by Nokia  
(e.g. as set out in the Product's user guide) and/or e)  
other acts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia.  
designated service locations and Nokia call centers can  
be found at local Nokia web pages where available.  
You must return your Product or the affected part (if it  
is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care center or  
Nokia designated service location before the expiry of  
the Warranty Period.  
When making a Limited Warranty claim you have to  
present: a) the Product (or affected part thereto), b) the  
legible and unmodified original proof of purchase,  
which clearly indicates the name and address of the  
seller, the date and place of purchase, the product type  
and the IMEI or other serial number.  
3. This Limited Warranty does not cover defects or  
alleged defects caused by the fact that the Product was  
used with, or connected to, a product, accessories,  
software and/or service not manufactured, supplied or  
authorized by Nokia or was used otherwise than for its  
intended use. Defects can be caused by viruses from  
your or from a third party's unauthorised access to  
services, other accounts, computer systems or  
networks. This unauthorised access can take place  
through hacking, password-mining or through a  
variety of other means.  
This Limited Warranty extends only to the original first  
end-user of the Product and is not assignable or  
transferable to any subsequent purchaser/end-user.  
W h a t i s n o t c o v e r e d ?  
1. This Limited Warranty does not cover user manuals  
or any third party software, settings, content, data or  
links, whether included/downloaded in the Product,  
4. This Limited Warranty does not cover defects caused  
by the fact that the battery has been short-circuited or  
by the fact that the seals of the battery enclosure or the  
1 4 1  
   
cells are broken or show evidence of tampering or by  
the fact that the battery has been used in equipment  
other than those for which it has been specified.  
the inability of Nokia to complete warranty repairs that  
are caused by the operator's delay or failure to unlock  
any SIM-lock or other lock.  
5. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product Please remember to make backup copies or keep  
has been opened, modified or repaired by anyone  
written records of all important content and data  
other than an authorized service centre, if it is repaired stored in your Product, because content and data may  
using unauthorised spare parts or if the Product’s serial be lost during repair or replacement of the Product.  
number, the mobile accessory date code or the IMEI  
Nokia, in a manner consistent with the provisions of  
number has been removed, erased, defaced, altered or the section entitled “Limitation of Nokia's Liability”  
are illegible in any way and this shall be determined in below, to the extent permitted by applicable law(s),  
the sole discretion of Nokia.  
shall not under any circumstances be liable, either  
expressly or implied, for any damages or losses of any  
kind whatsoever resulting from loss of, damage to, or  
corruption of, content or data during repair or  
replacement of the Product.  
6. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product  
has been exposed to moisture, to dampness or to  
extreme thermal or environmental conditions or to  
rapid changes in such conditions, to corrosion, to  
oxidation, to spillage of food or liquid or to influence  
from chemical products.  
All parts of the Product or other equipment that Nokia  
has replaced shall become the property of Nokia. If the  
returned Product is found not to be covered by the  
terms and conditions of the Limited Warranty, Nokia  
and its authorized service companies reserve the right  
to charge a handling fee. When repairing or replacing  
the Product, Nokia may use products or parts that are  
new, equivalent to new or reconditioned.  
O t h e r i m p o r t a n t  
n o t i c e s  
A third party, independent operator provides the SIM  
card and cellular and/or other network or system on  
which the Product operates. Therefore, Nokia will not  
accept responsibility under this warranty for the  
operation, availability, coverage, services or range of  
the cellular or other network or system. Before the  
Product can be repaired or replaced, the operator may  
need to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock that may have  
been added to lock the product to a specific network  
or operator. Accordingly, Nokia does not accept  
responsibility for any delays in warranty repairs or for  
Your Product may contain country specific elements,  
including software. If the Product has beenre-exported  
from its original destination country to another  
country, the Product may contain country specific  
elements that are not considered to be a defect under  
this Limited Warranty.  
1 4 2  
 
L i m i t a t i o n o f N o k i a ' s S t a t u t o r y o b l i g a t i o n s  
This Limited Warranty must be read subject to any  
l i a b i l i t y  
statutory provisions that imply warranties or  
conditions into this Limited Warranty that cannot be  
excluded, restricted or modified or cannot be excluded,  
restricted or modified except to a limited extent. If such  
statutoryprovisions apply, tothe extent to whichNokia  
is able to do so, its liability under those provisions will  
be limited, at its option to, in the case of goods: the  
replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent  
goods, the repair of the goods, the payment of the cost  
of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent  
goods, or the payment of the cost of having the goods  
repaired; and in the case of services: the supplying of  
the services again or the payment of the cost of having  
the services supplied again.  
This Limited Warranty is your sole and exclusive  
remedy against Nokia and Nokia's sole and exclusive  
liability in respect of defects in your Product. However,  
this Limited Warranty shall neither exclude nor limit i)  
any of your legal (statutory) rights under the applicable  
national laws or ii) any of your rights against the seller  
of the Product.  
This Limited Warranty replaces all other Nokia  
warranties and liabilities, whether oral, written, (non-  
mandatory) statutory, contractual, in tort or otherwise,  
including, without limitation, and where permitted by  
applicable law, any implied conditions, warranties or  
other terms as to satisfactory quality or fitness for  
purpose. To the extent permitted by applicable law(s)  
Nokia does not assume any liability for loss of or  
damage to or corruption of data, for any loss of profit,  
loss of use of Products or functionality, loss of business,  
loss of contracts, loss of revenues or loss of anticipated  
savings, increased costs or expenses or for any indirect  
loss or damage, consequential loss or damage or  
special loss or damage. To the extent permitted by  
applicable law, Nokia’s liability shall be limited to the  
purchase value of the Product. The above limitations  
shall not apply to death or personal injury resulting  
from Nokia’s proven negligence.  
N o t e : Your Product is a sophisticated electronic  
device. Nokia strongly encourages you to familiarise  
yourself with the user guide and instructions provided  
with and for the Product. Please also note that the  
Product might contain high precision displays, camera  
lenses and other such parts, which could be scratched  
or otherwise damaged if not handled very carefully.  
All warranty information, product features and  
specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Nokia Corporation  
Keilalahdentie 2-4  
FIN-02150 Espoo  
Finland  
1 4 3  
 
I n d e x  
a u d i o t h e m e s 2 6  
a u t o l o c k p e r i o d 1 1 5  
C a l e n d a r  
S y m b o l s / N u m e r i c s  
3 - D r i n g i n g t o n e s 2 6  
8 0 2 . 1 x  
adding received entries 45  
creating entries 45  
day view 47  
B
deleting entries 45  
month view 47  
sending entries 45  
settings 47  
b a c k g r o u n d i m a g e 2 5  
b a c k i n g u p d a t a 1 0 5  
b a t t e r y  
charging 14  
inserting 13  
b l o g s 4 9  
A
a c c e s s p o i n t s  
creating 117  
to-do view 47  
week view 47  
c a l e n d a r k e y 2 8  
c a l l b a r r i n g 3 8  
net calls 38  
a c t i v a t i o n k e y s 1 0 8  
A c t i v e n o t e s 6 4  
settings 64  
B l u e t o o t h  
a c t i v e s t a n d b y 2 1  
a l a r m c l o c k 7 0  
a l e r t t o n e s 1 1 4  
a l t i t u d e c a l i b r a t i o n 8 8  
a n i m a t e d s c r e e n s a v e r 2 5  
a n t e n n a s 3 1  
authorising devices 94  
c a l l d i v e r t 3 7  
pairing 94  
c a l l e r I D 1 1 6  
c a l l s  
passcode 94  
receiving data 93  
security 95  
answering 33  
barring net calls 38  
call waiting 116  
caller ID 116  
b r o w s i n g  
a p p l i c a t i o n s e t t i n g s 1 2 2  
a p p l i c a t i o n s  
common actions 22  
conference call 34  
fax calls 34  
offline 49  
installing 107  
web 48  
modifying installations 107  
shortcuts 114  
fixed dialling 44, 103  
making 33  
b u s i n e s s c a r d s 4 4  
sending 44  
a t t a c h m e n t s  
making a call from Log 42  
making a net call 37  
muting the ringing tone 33  
net call alert 116  
PTT 82  
e-mail 53  
C
multimedia messages 58  
sound clips 59  
c a b l e 9 1  
c a c h e  
a u d i o f i l e s  
emptying 49  
details 75  
1 4 4  
rejecting 33  
C a l c u l a t o r 6 5  
sending 75  
 
c o n n e c t o r s 1 5  
c o n t a c t s  
rejecting with text  
message 116  
E
e - m a i l  
selecting type 116  
settings 116  
adding thumbnails 42  
copying information 42  
creating 42  
automatic retrieval  
settings 63  
connecting to mailbox 53  
connection settings 62  
creating folders 54  
deleting 54  
speed dialling 37  
voice commands 40  
voice dialling 40  
voice mail 39  
groups 43  
ringing tones 43  
searching 42  
c a m e r a  
SIM card contacts 42  
SIM directory 44  
replying 53  
settings 73  
retrieval settings 62  
sending 54  
c o n t a c t s k e y 2 7  
c o n v e r t i n g  
setting up 52  
c a r k i t  
user settings 62  
writing 54  
remote SIM access 95  
c e l l b r o a d c a s t 6 0  
settings 63  
currencies 68  
measurements 68  
c u r r e n c y c o n v e r s i o n s 6 8  
c u s t o m e r s e r v i c e 1 9  
e - m a i l k e y 2 8  
E A P  
c e r t i f i c a t e s  
plug-in settings 120  
using an EAP plug-in 120  
e n d i n g  
internet connections 49  
network connections 100  
e n h a n c e m e n t s  
details 104  
D
d a t e  
settings 104  
c h a r g i n g t h e b a t t e r y 1 4  
C l o c k  
settings 115  
alarms 70  
d e s t i n a t i o n  
removing 88  
setting 88  
remote SIM access 95  
world clock 70  
c o n f e r e n c e c a l l s 3 4  
c o n f i g u r a t i o n m e s s a g e s 1 2 2  
c o n n e c t i o n m e t h o d s  
Bluetooth 93  
settings 115  
d i s p l a y  
e q u a l i s e r 7 6  
changing the look 25  
indicators 17  
settings 113  
D o w n l o a d !  
catalogs 111  
settings 111  
D T M F t o n e s 3 9  
F
f a x c a l l s 3 4  
f e e d s 4 9  
F i l e m a n a g e r 6 6  
f i l e s  
data cable 91  
infrared 92  
modem 100  
c o n n e c t i o n s  
downloading 73  
flash files 80  
sending 66  
ending 100  
GPRS settings 98  
WLAN settings 99  
1 4 5  
f i x e d d i a l l i n g 4 4 , 1 0 3  
f r e e m e m o r y 2 8  
i n s e r t i n g  
sending 90  
l a n g u a g e  
battery 13  
memory card 29  
SIM card 13  
changing 31  
G
settings 114  
i n s t a l l a t i o n l o g 1 0 7  
i n s t a l l i n g  
l o c k c o d e 1 0 2 , 1 1 5  
l o c k i n g  
G a l l e r y 7 3  
G e n u i n e e n h a n c e m e n t s 1 2 9  
G P R S  
applications 107  
device 102  
i n t e r n e t 4 8  
device autolock 115  
keypad 17, 115  
L o g 4 1  
access point settings 98  
advanced access point  
ending connections 49  
i n t e r n e t c a l l s 3 7  
settings 118  
Contacts 41  
deleting 41  
H
j a d f i l e s 1 0 7  
j a r f i l e s 1 0 7  
J a v a a p p l i c a t i o n s 1 0 7  
making a call 42  
sending messages 42  
settings 42  
h e a d s e t  
connecting 16  
h o m e k e y 2 7  
transfer log 24  
K
H S D P A ( h i g h - s p e e d d o w n l i n k  
p a c k e t a c c e s s ) 9 1  
l o g o s  
k e y s t o r e 1 0 5  
k e y g u a r d 1 7  
k e y p a d  
operator logo 114  
welcome logo 113  
I
I M  
lock settings 115  
M
application settings 79  
blocking users 79  
groups 78  
m a i l b o x e s  
tones 114  
connecting 53  
k e y s 1 5  
creating 52  
activation keys 108  
shortcuts 114  
WEP keys 119  
settings 78  
m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s 1 9  
m a k i n g a c a l l 3 3  
m e a s u r e m e n t s  
converting 68  
m e a s u r i n g s y s t e m  
changing 88  
starting a conversation 78  
i m a g e s  
adding to contacts 74  
display background 74  
rotating 73  
L
l a n d m a r k s  
sending 74  
categories 89  
creating 89  
editing 89  
receiving 90  
m e m o r y 2 8  
m e m o r y c a r d  
zooming 73  
i n d i c a t o r s 1 7  
i n f r a r e d 9 2  
1 4 6  
backing up data 105  
formatting 29  
track lists 76  
restricting 122  
settings 118  
locking 102  
N
p a i r i n g  
microSD 29  
passwords 102  
setting password 29, 66  
unlocking 29  
devices 94  
n e t c a l l s 3 7  
passcode 94  
alert settings 116  
p a s s w o r d s  
barring 38  
m e n u 2 2  
memory card password 29,  
connecting 36  
making a call 37  
profiles 36, 122  
settings 122  
m e s s a g e r e a d e r 5 1  
m e s s a g e s 5 0  
66  
P C S u i t e 9 1  
P D F r e a d e r 6 9  
p e r s o n a l i s a t i o n 2 5  
changing language 114  
display 113  
configuration messages 122  
other settings 63  
sending sound clips 59  
service messages 59  
text message settings 60  
M e s s a g i n g  
settings 117  
N o k i a M a p s 8 5  
N o k i a P C S u i t e 9 1  
N o k i a s u p p o r t a n d c o n t a c t  
i n f o r m a t i o n 1 9  
N o k i a T e a m S u i t e 6 7  
action bar settings 67  
editing teams 67  
settings 67  
standby modes 114  
tones 114  
p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s  
forwarding 56  
viewing 55  
P I N c o d e  
folders 50, 51  
m i c r o S D 2 9  
changing 115  
m o d e m 1 0 0  
p l a y i n g  
N o t e s 7 1  
m u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e s  
attachments 58  
messages 51  
n o t i f i c a t i o n l i g h t 1 1 4  
recordings 77  
O
p o s i t i o n i n g  
o p e r a t o r  
settings 84  
logo 114  
p r e d i c t i v e t e x t i n p u t 3 1 , 1 1 4  
p r e s e n t a t i o n s 5 7  
p r i n t e r s e t t i n g s 7 0  
p r i n t i n g 6 9  
receiving 57  
selecting 117  
o r i g i n a l s e t t i n g s 1 1 6  
replying to 57  
sending 56  
sending options 59  
settings 61  
P
p r o f i l e s  
p a c k e t d a t a  
m u l t i t a s k i n g 2 8  
M u s i c p l a y e r  
creating 24  
access point settings 98  
advanced access point  
settings 98  
customising 24, 25  
net call profile 36, 122  
selecting ringing tones 25  
listening to music 75  
1 4 7  
music categories 76  
P T T  
r e s t o r i n g o r i g i n a l s e t t i n g s 1 1 6  
r i n g i n g t o n e s 4 3 , 1 1 4  
3-D 26  
advanced WLAN 118  
application installations 107  
applications 122  
Calendar 47  
contacts 83  
created calls 82  
creating a channel 83  
exiting 83  
in profiles 25  
vibrating alert 114  
calls 116  
logging in 82  
making a call 82  
settings 82  
camera 73  
S
cell broadcast 63  
certificate 104  
clock 70  
s a t e l l i t e s i g n a l s t r e n g t h 8 8  
s a v i n g  
Q
date 115  
files 22  
display 113  
Q u i c k o f f i c e 6 6  
Download! application 111  
e-mail connection 62  
e-mail retrieval 63  
e-mail user 62  
EAP plug-ins 120  
enhancements 115  
GPRS 98, 118  
settings 22  
R
s c r e e n s a v e r 2 5 , 1 1 3  
S e a r c h a p p l i c a t i o n 6 5  
search results 65  
s e a r c h i n g  
r a d i o  
listening to 80  
saved stations 81  
settings 81  
available WLANs 100  
contacts 42  
viewing visual content 81  
IM 78  
s e c u r i t y  
R e a l P l a y e r  
Java application security 107  
keypad lock 115  
language 114  
Log 42  
Bluetooth 95  
playing media clips 74  
sending files 75  
settings 75  
device and SIM card 115  
memory card 102  
s e c u r i t y m o d u l e 1 0 5  
s e n d i n g  
viewing clip details 75  
multimedia messages 61  
net call 122  
playing recordings 77  
network 117  
files 22, 66  
Nokia Team Suite 67  
packet data 118  
positioning 84  
printer 70  
videos 35  
r e c o r d i n g  
s e r v i c e c o m m a n d s 5 9  
s e r v i c e m e s s a g e s 5 9  
settings 63  
sound clips 77  
video clips 72  
PTT 82  
r e m o t e c o n f i g u r a t i o n 1 0 5  
r e m o t e l o c k 1 0 2  
r e m o t e s y n c h r o n i s a t i o n 1 1 0  
r e p a i r s e r v i c e s 1 9  
radio 81  
s e s s i o n i n i t i a t i o n p r o t o c o l  
See SIP  
RealPlayer 75  
recorder 77  
1 4 8  
s e t t i n g s  
restoring 116  
Active notes 64  
s o f t w a r e u p d a t e 1 1 1  
s o u n d c l i p s  
service messages 63  
SIP 120  
changing 25  
downloading 26  
t i m e  
standby mode 114  
text messages 60  
time 115  
recording 77  
sending 59  
settings 115  
t o - d o e n t r i e s 4 6  
t o n e s 1 1 4  
S p e e c h 5 1  
s p e e d d i a l l i n g 3 7  
s t a n d b y m o d e s  
tones 114  
Web 49  
settings 114  
t r a c k l i s t s 7 6  
active standby 21  
settings 114  
t r a d i t i o n a l t e x t i n p u t 3 0  
T r a n s f e r  
WEP security 119  
WLAN 118  
s u p p o r t i n f o r m a t i o n 1 9  
s w i t c h i n g d e v i c e o n a n d o f f 1 6  
S y m b i a n a p p l i c a t i o n s 1 0 7  
s y n c h r o n i s a t i o n 2 4  
settings 110  
WLAN access point 99  
WLAN security 119  
S e t t i n g s w i z a r d 2 0  
s h o r t c u t s 1 2 3  
applications 114  
keys 114  
log 24  
t r a n s f e r r i n g d a t a 2 3  
t r i p d e s t i n a t i o n 8 8  
t r i p m e t e r 8 8  
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 1 3 0  
synchronisation profiles 110  
U
s i g n a l s t r e n g t h 1 7  
S I M a c c e s s p r o f i l e 9 5  
S I M c a r d  
s y n c h r o n i s i n g  
applications 110  
U P I N c o d e  
changing 115  
T
inserting 13  
U S B d a t a c a b l e 9 1  
text messages 55  
S I M c h a n g e l o c k 1 1 5  
S I M d i r e c t o r y 4 4  
S I P  
t a b s 2 2  
t e x t  
changing size 113  
traditional input 30  
t e x t m e s s a g e s  
messages on SIM card 55  
sending 54  
v i b r a t i n g a l e r t 1 1 4  
v i d e o c a l l s  
editing profiles 121  
editing proxy servers 121  
servers 121  
making a call 34  
switching to voice call 34  
v i d e o c l i p s 7 2  
details 75  
playing 74  
settings 120  
sending 75  
s i s f i l e s 1 0 7  
sending options 55  
settings 60  
v i d e o s h a r i n g 3 5  
receiving invitations 35  
V o i c e a i d 3 9  
s i s x f i l e s 1 0 7  
s o f t w a r e p a c k a g e s  
installation settings 107  
installing 107  
writing 54  
1 4 9  
t h e m e s  
audio 26  
v o i c e c o m m a n d s  
changing profiles 41  
launching an application 40  
settings 41  
WEP keys 119  
WPA security settings 120  
W L A N w i z a r d 9 6  
w o r l d c l o c k 7 0  
W P A s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s 1 2 0  
w r i t i n g l a n g u a g e 3 1  
v o i c e m a i l  
calling 39  
changing number 39  
v o i c e o v e r I P 3 7  
V o I P 3 7  
Z
Z i p m a n a g e r 6 8  
v o l u m e 2 7  
w a l l p a p e r 7 4  
w a r n i n g t o n e s 1 1 4  
W e b  
connection security 48  
settings 49  
w e b l o g s 4 9  
W e l c o m e a p p l i c a t i o n 2 0  
w e l c o m e n o t e 1 1 3  
W E P  
keys 119  
security settings 119  
W L A N  
802.1x security settings 119  
access point settings 99  
settings 99  
advanced settings 118  
availability 96  
MAC address 96, 118  
searching for networks 100  
security settings 119  
settings 118  
1 5 0  
Nokia Care Online  
INTERACTIVE  
DEMONSTRATIONS  
The Nokia Care web support provides you with more information on our online services.  
INTERACTIVE DEMONSTRATIONS  
Learn how to set up your phone for the first time, and find out more about its features.  
Interactive Demonstrations give step-by-step instructions on using your phone.  
SOFTWARE  
USER’S GUIDE  
The online User’s Guide contains detailed information on your phone. Remember to check  
regularly for updates.  
SOFTWARE  
Make the most of your phone with software for your phone and PC. Nokia PC Suite connects  
your phone and PC so you can manage your calendar, contacts, music and images, while  
other applications complement its use.  
SETTINGS  
Certain phone functions, such as multimedia messaging, mobile browsing and email*,  
may require settings before you can use them. Have them sent to your phone free of charge.  
USER’S GUIDE  
*Not available on all phones.  
SETTINGS  
HOW DO I USE MY PHONE?  
The Set Up section, at www.nokia-asia.com/setup, helps you prepare your phone for use. Familiarise yourself with phone functions  
and features by referring to the Guides and Demos section at www.nokia-asia.com/guides.  
HOW DO I SYNCHRONISE MY PHONE AND PC?  
Connecting your phone to a compatible PC with the requisite Nokia PC Suite version from www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite lets you  
synchronise your calendar and contacts.  
WHERE CAN I GET SOFTWARE FOR MY PHONE?  
Get more out of your phone with downloads from the Software section at www.nokia-asia.com/software.  
WHERE CAN I FIND ANSWERS TO COMMON QUESTIONS?  
Look up the FAQ section at www.nokia-asia.com/faq for answers to your questions on your phone and other Nokia products and  
services.  
HOW DO I KEEP UP WITH NOKIA NEWS?  
Subscribe online at www.nokia-asia.com/signup and be the first to know about the latest products and promotions. Sign up for "Nokia  
Connections" to receive monthly updates on latest phones and technology. Sign up for "Be The First To Know" to get exclusive  
previews of new phone announcements or subscribe to "Promotional Communications" for upcoming events.  
Should you still require further assistance, please refer to www.nokia-asia.com/contactus.  
For additional information on repair services, please visit www.nokia-asia.com/repair.  
Please visit your own country site for more details:  
Australia and New Zealand  
India  
Indonesia  
Japan  
Malaysia  
Philippines  
Singapore  
Thailand  
If your country is not listed above, please visit www.nokia-asia.com/support.  

Sony USM128ED User Manual
Sony MD Walkman MZ R500PC User Manual
Siemens C70 User Manual
Sentry Industries CA110 User Manual
Seagate MOMENTUS ST92811A User Manual
Sanyo MCD XP630 User Manual
Salton FSCM100 User Manual
Philips FM01FD00B User Manual
Panasonic SC AK523 User Manual
Atmor new80 User Manual